Home

User`s Manual

1. 7 Graphic Display 7 1 Graphic Diagram 7 1 1 Position of the fixed points 7 1 2 Correlation factor ssssssssssseeeeeeeennen 7 1 8 Response ratio 20 OCT 1997 FIX i AXIS 330 User s Manual FE WV eic MH nM 12 7 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector 12 7 2 2 F2 Display Inverter 12 7 2 3 F3 Printout 7 2 4 F4 Graph Saver AXIS 330 NANCO Software FIX ii 20 OCT 1997 Fixed Position Mode 1 Description The Fixed Position mode simulates a variable error in one of the feed parameters while measuring the deviation or amplitudes in one or two fixed positions Fig FIX101 Fixed Position Mode This mode is very useful to determine whether a selected monitor position or a measuring point in the field will give the same response to feed errors as the far field along the approach path AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 FIX 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Panel The data panel shows the values to be used in the fixed position mode computa tion The data panel is divided into four main parts 1 the fixed points position data 2 the error data 3 the toggle panel 4 the command row os LE M Sidewago 123 6 Haight 641 7 7a 3 883 Buhntenna Wims 3 Farapeter Ho 6 Pine HIN Error i75 3B H HAX Error
2. 5 4 F6 Excel 5 5 F10 Menu T ni 5 6 Continue CR nete nennen nnne nnne nnne G Table display sites 5 e RO PD eee RI sense deste ed 7 Graphic Display 7 1 Graphic Diagram LP EUCtlon ere at ROO ARE ns Re RER 7 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector 7 2 2 F2 Display Inverter 7 2 3 F3 Printout eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 2 4 F4 Graph Saver 7 2 5 Curve Tracer sine recie pectore deren 4 2 4 3 4 4 45 4 6 20 OCT 1997 LAT i AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO Software LAT ii 20 OCT 1997 Lateral Trace Mode 1 Description The Lateral Trace Mode simulates a circular movement in a given sector across the course line at a defined distance from the antenna system Fig LAT101 The Lateral Trace mode With the Lateral Trace Mode you can study different parameters like CDI or DDM SBO and CSB amplitude and phases as well as the Beam Bend Potential Upto six separate runs at user selected distances and arc centers can be done on each graph AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1995 LAT 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Screen The Data Screen is divided into three main parts 1 the table of numeric data 2 the toggle panel 3 the command row AAIE 3E LLE lal eA Gl A ee Lateral Trace WEEbBangg to carcle 1BRREr EH Birtanru Eraxe Bata for now run Elevation angle 1 88 E MI az angle i m Gan FH RAK az
3. CXTRA km AXIS 330 NANCO BND 14 20 AUG 1994 Software Bend Analysis Mode Fig BND503 The graph screen when Y shift is adjusted 5 2 3 Minimum Distance nu The lt Left Right gt arrow keys can be used to change the minimum displayed distance in 10m steps lt Ctrl Left Ctrl Right gt will change in 100m steps The value of the parameter is stepped by lt Left Right arrows gt and the text field is shown the value until you press lt enter gt for redraw or use another position key Bocunestat Los Bead faa lysis Track AZ 0 0 Proj level 1e Fig BND504 The graph screen when Minimum Distance Begin is ad justed 5 2 4 Maximum distance PgUp PgDn The lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt keys can be used to change the maximum displayed dis tance in 100m steps The value of the parameter is stepped by lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt keys and the text field is shown the value as long as you press lt enter gt for redraw or another posi tion keys Bocusestat Lou Bead Malia Track RE 8 8 Proj level 16H lt Fositios ad fisted Fig BND505 The graph screen when Maximum Distance End is adjust AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 15 AXIS 330 User s Manual ed 5 3 Functions The functions of the graph display are F1 B amp W Black amp White to Colour Selector F2 Invert Invert the display colours for cut amp paste purposes F3 Print Print the graph to a
4. The maximum longitudinal distance from the GP mast that will be displayed in the graphic diagram 3 3 2 Taxiway Location Taxi way dist m lt 183 gt The lateral distance between the runway andthe taxiway centres Default value is 183m 600feet If less than 25 is selected the taxiway will disappear AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 2002 SNS 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 4 Receiver Position or Track 3 Data entry for the receiver is selected by 3 key three and is depending on the selected track options selected by the Track toggle In case of Pt C the AXIS330 is using a fixed receiver position In the other options the computation is made by moving the receiver position track along the glide path downward extension down to the threshold at 15m height The first line of the entry screen is showing the calculated distances to the ICAO Annex10 ILS points A thorugh C plus T Herz iru Pud dirt m VM Reco dear du dirt m DED I era iver height m 38 817 i BEurnivur track Bucuiunr start mh X 1335 I Encu ivar ztop im SHB _ Fig SNS303 Data Entry for Receiver position track Note Entry for the receiver data is disabled as long as the memory has the earlier computed results Erase toggle DATA 3 4 1 Receiver Location Pnt C The default values of the receiver location represent the ILS point C Forward Distance Receiver Fwd dist m 572 The receiver fwd distanc
5. Weight distance m m lt 180 gt After entered a desired distance or just pressing Enter to keep the default value the software will open the RPL Result Panel 4 1 3 Continue F4 This command enables to run calculation again for example for a different weight point Note If no data is entered or loaded the F4 key will quit the utilities and the software go back to the Control Panel 4 1 4 Quit CR Returns the program to the Control Panel AXIS 330 NANCO Ss 20 AUG 1994 STET AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 2 RPL Result Panel The RPL Result Panel contains the calculation results consisting of 1 Entered measurement values 2 Calculated baseline average and extension weighted heights 3 Extended baseline weight factors and weighted heights 4 Baseline FSL and GP zero 5 Final FSL and GP zero Baseline and Extension combined In addition there are five functions in the RPL Result Panel for utilizing the re sults or control the software execution i I EPS LA ET Aes BR zs BH mm Bes I SE En caulem EEFI P TPPPP 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 H 1 i koka GM HIDPHIHIMEH T Gum cm 7 Hg B a B B g B B B a Ex H id B In eee B 13 2 Eh B PE B ck oO AL LT ph i FJ Eaue peoulto CFASFEL BL BGS Fb2Liot data CE fo y Fig UTL406 The RPL Result Panel 4 3 Functions in RPL Result Panel There are five function in the RPL Result Panel as fol
6. 2 iR teet trees Sets 3 3 1 Length of the X axis ss 9 9 2 T8XIWay LOCallOlT e eR EROR 3 4 Receiver Position or Track 3 3 4 1 Receiver Location Cat l 3 4 2 Receiver Track Cat II amp III 3 4 2 1 Start distance 3 4 2 2 Storp distance 3 5 F2 Calculation parameters 3 5 1 Elevation Angle 3 5 2 Threshold distance 3 5 3 Receiver Speed ii 815 4 PONS MC 5 1 F8 Scattering Sheet sssssssssseneeeeee 5 2 1 SCAM ALC aes tdt AR Re artt aser ERE e din AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20JAN 2005 SNS i AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 3 2 DISBIay 5 s Ero rper PERRO D RENE dert 5 4 3 RX Position or Track bib E2 Change E tee REP Pee dee 5 6 FS Text 5 7 5 8 F4 Limit of Bend F10 Menu 5 9 F9 Display values 5 10 CR Continue 6 Computed Result 6 1 Graphic Display teo ether enema enters 6 2 F nctloris OAE RI eee RE 6 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector 6 2 2 F2 Display Inverter 0 eee cee eee eects seas sees teeeeeeeaeeaes 6 2 3 F3 PrintoUut eek inl adenine oe aera 6 2 4 F4 Graph Saver ir AXIS 330 NANCO SNS ii 20JAN 2005 Software Sensitive Area Mode 1 Description This module i
7. AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 UTL i AXIS 330 User s Manual D OPIMIZINU ret E RR EUER RUN ONERE UNE 5 1 Optimizing type selection seseeeeee 5 2 T errain illumination cancellation F5 m 5 2 1 Data Entty ore tete eres 5 3 G round Current reduction F6 sssseeee 5 9 Data Entty ee eee 5 4 Another method to reduce SBO ground current ns 5 5 Example ette v Re ER eU ee alae 19 AXIS 330 NANCO Software UTL ii 20 AUG 1994 Utilities 1 Description The utility routines is a collection of useful routines to help simulation model settings in the AXIS 330 There are four utility routines and they are called by the F4 key in the Control Panel 1 MCU settings 2 ADU adjustments 3 Reflection plane slope computation 4 Optimize feeds to a Top or Ground Plane tot ARTS 438 ILE GLIBEFRTH SIBHLATOR 8 H BRED Tine Us zF2 HU setting FA3 AM ndjuoteent FA RefIeotion plane ninpa Doit at ion Fh y imiz Feedo to a Tap of Ground Flans Fig UTL101 Utility selection screen Notel Three of these utilities are external modules MCU amp ADU is run by A330ADX EXE and the reflection plane slope is run by A330RPX EXE Note2 In some cases where AXIS is run under other menu programs like Nortons Windows etc too much memory could be used up and the external modules are not able to run In this case AXIS returns to the Co
8. Also the printer port LPT1 or LPT2 as well as the gray scale can be set by running the EDITGRAF from the DOS promtin the AXIS directory Itis recommended to select 1 level of gray scale to maintain a good black amp white contrast on the printout How to move an AXIS graphics to the word proces sors in Windows Graph screen can be tranferred to another program using windows clipboard Start AXIS from the program manager of the windows After a graph has been drawn use the F1 key to turn off the colours and then the F2 key to invertthe Black amp White Press the Print S creen key on your computer to putthe graph into the clipboard Open your application word prosessor E xcel or any graphic program and paste the content of the clipboard into the application by Ctrl V or Shift Ins You can also use a Windows clipping function by toggling lt Alt Enter gt key after the graph is ready drawn in AXIS Then select EDIT and MARK the part of the graph you will copy In this case use Alt PrtScreen to put the graph into the clipboard Note P rtS creen key copies the whole screen to the clipboard lt Alt P rtS creen key copies only the marked content of the active window to the clipboard If the text has been marked it must be un marked to enable returning to AXIS full screen by AIt E nter A4 2 20 AUG 1994 Questions and Answers Appendix4 Can special printer commands be sent In some cases
9. E388 rre peto e a ea ARE RE 4 4 ner x eeeneenee 4 5 P arameter 4 6 S ense 4 7 M ultiple 4 8 H gt scale 5 Gommandss admettre R cape me T 5 1 F2 Change nennen eee tre horn De ha ER dtd 5 2 F3 Text 5 3 F4 FSD 5 4 FG EXC6l ciini eee REPRE 5 5 F10 Mehr nte cete ette de Sen UNE ee ties 5 6 Continue CR 6 Table display 7 Graphic Display 7 1 Graphic Diagram 7 1 1 Two dimensional graphic diagram 7 1 2 Three dimensional graphic diagram 1 2 FUnCcHOrgs rudentes DU en Oed 7 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector 7 2 2 F2 Display Inverter eesses 7 2 8 ES PrintOUt siete lenit tetris 7 2 4 F4 Graph Saver ss a a a eS ek 20 OCT 1997 VRT i AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 2 5 F8 Scattering Object Editor 13 7 2 6 Alt F8 Offset all Scattering Sheets together 13 42 4 GUNO Tracer xe sects sen vast ee Ed 14 AXIS 330 NANCO Software VRT ii 20 OCT 1997 Vertical Trace Mode 1 Description The Vertical Trace Mode simulates a vertical movement above a defined point on the ground Max angle Min angle Fig VRT101 Vertical Trace Mode The software needs to know the x y coordinates FWD and SDW distance on the ground location where the trace t
10. F2 Invert This function will invert the colours of the display In the colour display the col ours will be changed to their complementary ones 7 2 3 F3 Printout F3 Print This function allows the feed parameters and the graph to be printed out for documentation purposes Make sure that correct printer driver Grafplus or Gra flasr is loaded before starting the AXIS 330 otherwise no graph will be printed only the text Normally this is done by the GP BAT file Note If you haven t the colour printer it is recommended to change display inverted black amp white mode using F1 and F2 keys before printing 7 2 4 F4 Graph Saver F4 Save Note This function is enabled and displayed only when the screen is se lected as black amp white The Graph Saver is used to save the graphic screen to the disk on a selected SHOW directory The names of the files will be generated automatically and the first save is named as AXGO BAS second AXG1 BAS third AXG2 BAS and so on Before saving go to the Playback menu item on the Main Menu and select the wanted directory See the PLY section The saving format is the basic language BSAVE BLOAD mode enabling the fastest Load and play back in the AXIS 330 20 AUG 1994 LAT 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 2 5 Curve Tracer Values gt This function is used to show the exact value along the curves The point on the curve is shown with a small square called cursor and can b
11. The Thr hgt is the height of the actual runway centerline surface at the threshold referred to GP ZERO at the antenna mast and is the linear extensions of FSL and SSL plus the Step Height 3 8 4 See Fig CPN309 Note This data is calculated automatically and can not be changed by the user 3 8 3 Threshold Crossing Height Xing hgt m The Xing hgt crossing height is the height of the downward extended course line abovethe threshold Nominal value is 15 m in tolerance 0m 3m AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 18 20 AUG 2002 PS AXIS 330 NANCO Software Control Panel 3 8 4 Step Height Step hgt m The Step hgt is the non linear height variation of the terrain slopes between the GP mastand the threshold and represents the difference from linear extensions of FSL and SSL See fig CPN309 If there is a step in the terrain at the runway shoulder or a variation in the slopes the actual measured value of the Threshold Height may be different from what is computed from FSL and SSL based on the existing or planned GP antenna posi tion In that case the step value can be entered to this field so that the Thr hgt 3 8 2 will indicate the measured value Step hgt 3 8 4 Theoretical Thr hgt FSL SSL Fig CPN309 Threshold heights This will also change the theoretical THR distance in order to maintain the nomi nal threshold crossing height There are two ways of processing this further 1 The GP antennais already i
12. 1 GP type 2 Number of scattering objects 3 Receiver response rad s 4 Printer form feed selection and 5 Type of screen CPN 30 20 AUG 1999 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Control Panel Here is a summary of the menu selections 0 Control Panel F10 key Return to the Control Panel by pressing 0 zero or F10 1 Playback Screen files The Playback Screen files mode is a slide show It will replay previously com puted and saved screens This mode is a useful animation tool for showing the total impact of gradually increasing errors when they are replayed as a movie or comparing nearly identical graphs See section PLY 2 Lateral Trace The Lateral Trace mode is a simulation of an orbit crossover in the azimuth plane to see the deviation SBO CSB amplitudes or RF phase at a given dis tance and elevation angle See section LAT 3 Vertical Trace The Vertical Trace mode is a simulation of the resulting glide path deviation and amplitudes along a vertical line above given coordinates in the terrain This mode can be used to check angle and sectors as well as clearance below and above the full sectors See section VRT 4 Window Overview The Window Overview mode displays the ISO deviation lines from 300uA fly up to 225uA fly down in the coverage sectors of the GP system The main usage of this mode is diagnostics of erratic symptoms based on flight inspection measurements See section WND 5
13. 2 Goto Setup by the F3 key 3 Proceed to the Setup Command Panel by pressing lt enter gt 4 Save the setting by the F3 key 3 3 2 Meters Feet selection The Meters Feet selection was set in the Control Panel If the system has meters as default and feet is wanted follow these steps 1 Toggle from meters to feet by Alt M on the Control Panel 2 Goto Setup by the F3 key 3 Proceed to the Setup Command Panel by pressing lt enter gt 4 Savethe setting by the F3 key AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 NOV 1994 SET 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 3 3 Language selection The default language is selected in the Command Panel of the SetUp If another default language is wanted follow the steps described in para 5 1 in this section 3 3 4 Renaming the Work and Graph directories The default directories for working files is WORK while for the saved graphic screens it is SHOW If another default directory name is wanted follow the steps described in para 5 3 in this section AXIS 330 NANCO SET 6 20 NOV 1994 Software SetUp 4 Colour Settings The colour settings are effecting only in the text screens and the graph diagram colours must be set changing the graph colour file content manually with text editor The graph colours are coded in the file GP 009 It should be noted that curves are drawn in preset colours so changing colours carelessly the graphic screen can look very strange For inst
14. 7 48 8 Ince Step 495 1 B Zoale center z BBE ull poala t 5 BBEXE MEE oo riy ion Fig FIX201 The data panel of the fixed position mode 2 1 Fixed point position data 1 This table shows all the numeric parameters that is used in simulation The value of the numeric data can be changed by F2 command Point No 1 Point No 2 Forward Forward distance of the point along the centerline Sideways Sideways distance of the point Height Height of the point meters and angles 2 2 Error data 2 AntennaNumber Antennaelement Parameter No Error source parameter MIN Error Error start value MAX Error Error stop value Incr Step Error step value Scale Center Graph display center not shown in TABL mode Full Scale Graph display full scale not shown in TABL mode Description Text line displayed on graph diagram AXIS 330 NANCO FIX 2 20 OCT 1997 Software Fixed Position Mode 2 3 Toggle panel 3 The toggles consist of the set of fixed value parameters settings that can be changed by toggling the character key allocated to the item letter inside the brackets A mplitude Selection between percent and decibel dB D isplay Selection the output form between graph and table E rase Erase last computed DATA for enabling a new run I ncr x Factor for step value to be used to increase the computing resolution N Points Selection the number of points between one or two P arameter Selectthe display
15. 7 1 1 Two dimensional graph 7 1 2 Three dimensional graph 7 2 F nlCtioris emite EI e Ode o ERE dne teh ee dian 7 2 1 Black amp White to Colour Selector 1 2 2 Display Inverter ite re tree retten PPO PEIDIOUE Lene Es A RE ERAN EIRMRRN PESE IE RDA LESS 12 4 Graph Saver iiis eee dep eie deer ties 20 OCT 1997 GND i AXIS330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO GND ii 20O0CT 1997 Software Ground Current Mode 1 Description This mode visualises the ground current induced on the reflection plane yielding the total reflected signal from the ground plane This mode is used to compare the available reflection plane area to the actual system requirements and get an impression of where the signal reflections basi cally takes place in around the antenna system Calculating the ground current is useful to determine whether a reflection plane area is sufficient to reflect the entire distributed ground current and will also indicate which area is sensitive or critical for ground movements The currents can be displayed either two or three dimensionally When the reflection plane is limited changes in system feeds will be seen to have significant impact on the signal quality along the approach path The M ARRAY glide path can often be optimized to operate satisfactory under such environment AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 GND 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Panel The data
16. Approach The Approach mode is a Simulation of an approach path at either constant level ideal hyperbolic line of constant zero deviation or tracked by a theodolite located at the coordinates determined by user This mode is useful in the simulation of the scattering objects If scattering objects are entered they may show bends and scalloping along the approach See section APP AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 CPN 31 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 7 Fixed Position The Fixed Position mode is a simulation of the resulting deviation and ampli tudes in one or two positions while a selected feed parameter is varied be tween chosen limits The main purpose of this mode is to compare the far field and the near field response to possible errors in the antenna system to examine the monitor and the ground check points sensitivity See section FIX Ground Current The Ground Current mode is a visualization 2D or 3D of the ground current induced on the reflection plane This mode is used to compare the available reflection plane area to the actual system requirements See section GND 8 Bend Analysis The Bend Analysis mode will analyse the bend wave lengths and their position along the flight path to find the possible origin of the reflection objects as inter sections of hyperbolic lines plotted on the ground See section BND 9 Sensitive Area The Sensitive Area mode will simulate the tailfin of a movi
17. F6 is pressed the AXIS 330 asks the name of the file as follows Current file name DATA XL CR or enter new The default name is DATA XL Type a new name or just press Enter to keep the default name The name must be according to the DOS specification other wise it will be truncated name 8 letters and extension 3 letters After the file name is entered this command will be shown as a filename between angle brackets To disable this function press F6 again and the original com mand text F6 Excel is displayed 5 6 F10 2Menu Function key F10 returns the program execution into the Main menu 5 7 Continue CR Starts the fixed mode run AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 FIX 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 Table display If the Display toggle is selected as a TABL the computed results will be displayed as a list of the parameter values This will also enable an Excel readable file to be saved on the disk if the F6 command key is pressed Before the execution of the list the user is asked if the list should be printed out Hardcopy of Results y or SPACE Enter Y or SPACE if the results should be printed out The display will stop while the screen is full and the user is asked to hit any key to continue That will be repeated until all computed results are shown The list includes the following parameters X Error value CDI Course deviation in uA or DDM CSB Course CSB
18. Fixe Fos it fom CBE gn 1 F 1BBBB BBRm 3 127 Hm H 3 88 ZIF B3 BHm 3 B Bm Hs 4 3681 If Fob 25g amp Ctr Corr B THE wi 1 274 FLT BOW Monitor 3 miicate D pA when Adis de phased 14 5 while the far field is Jp A where monitor ts located Zim ton Tar eut than ideal an Error Fase tesa Hueber 3 aa FLAU FZ Emeert F3 Friet FA Sone Fig FIX701 The typical graphic diagram of the fixed position mode in case of A3 phase error 7 1 1 Position of the fixed points In the second row of the screen is shown between the angle brackets the position s of the fixed point s where F forward position S sideway position and H height AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 FIX 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 1 7 1 2 Correlation factor Corr 0 788 The correlation factor will tell how equal the curves respond to the same error range Best correlation is 1 and the worst is O zero A value of 1 indicates that the curves respond in exactly the opposite way The correlation factor will also de pends on the min and max error range For monitor correlation examination the phase should not be more that 20 and the amplitude 5dB to be within the expected operating range 3 Response ratio 02 01 1 273 The response ratio 02 01 indicates how much curve 2 changes in amplitude compared to curve 1 The ideal ratio is 1 but if curve 2 shows only half the am plitude variati
19. Min AZ angle lt 12 gt The start angle of the orbit is called minimum azimuth angle and measured from the orbit center in degrees The default value is 12 3 5 Stop angle Max AZ angle lt 12 gt The stop angle of the orbit run is called maximum azimuth angle is measured from the orbit center in degrees The default value is 12 3 6 Angle step Increment 0 10 The angle step is an angle increments to be used in the calculations The default value is 0 5 Note Also the lt I gt key in the toggle panel can be used to shorten the incre ment The toggle lt I gt does not effect to this setting but only the cal culation 3 7 Graphic Centerline Graph Scale Centerline uA lt O gt The center axis of the graph might be offset to the average deviation value at the approach azimuth angle in order to zoom in on the curve Note The graph full scale deflection FSD is selected by lt F4 gt command 3 8 Description text Description nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Enter new Text _ Type the new text max 21 characters that should go along with the graph or just press Enter to leave the present text Note Any longer text than 21 characters will be truncated AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 LAT 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 Toggles The toggles allow quick changes to some of the often used settings Press the key shown between the brackets to execute the function If the language is not E
20. Now you may copy screen files to other directories or diskettes etc Type EXIT to return to AXIS AXIS 330 NANCO Software PLY 4 20 AUG 1994 Playback Screen files 2 6 Make a directory label F7 Description Any directory may have an optional label containing a 21 character description of the saved files This could be a specific airport name or anything that will remain the user of the content The label text can be changed anytime by using the F7 key and typing the new text This label will be deleted if all files are deleted by the F4 key 2 7 Make a new show directory F8 Make directory When a non existing directory name has been selected a warning will be shown Use the F8 key to create this directory If not created the directory name will automatically be set to SHOW 2 8 Exit lt CR gt Return Press Enter to return to the Main menu AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 PLY 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 Speed Control of the slide show While the slide show is running you can adjust the speed by using the or keys On the left hand side of the screen you can see sign which is as a simple speed gauge The higher the position the faster the speed Default speed is maximum so the sign is shown in the highest position Any other key will freeze the display and at the bottom of screen will appear the help row In the freezed state you can look at each screen by steppin
21. R esolution Selection for the computing resolution grid size in Azimuth Elevation LOW low resolution gives a fast look using a very coarse grid 4 0 8 MED medium resolution is a normal mode with 2 0 4 grid HIGH high resolution is good when having errors and scattering ob jects using 1 0 2 grid V HI very high resolution uses a 1 0 1 grid giving a best resolution but ismore time consuming 4 3 E rase Selection for erasing the earlier computed data OK the data in the memory has been erased and a new curve may now be computed DATA the memory still contains the last results and the curve may be displayed again with altered toggle settings 4 4 P arameter Selects the displayed parameter like CDI CSB SBO and Phase When showing amplitudes the levels are referred to the peak CSB level at the course line which is set to 10096 in the 2D mode CDI The CDI diagram DDM values are not available CSB Shows the CSB curves SBO Shows the SBO curves Phas Phase curves show the SBO CSB phase relationship When CLR signal is on this will be the Clearance amplitude instead of AXIS 330 NANCO WND 4 20 JAN 2005 Software Window Overview Mode phase 4 5 S een from Selection from where the window overview is seen Air seen from the air Gnd seen from the ground 4 6 W nd 3D Note This toggle is enabled and shown only in case there are computed data in the memory Erase toggle shows DATA Th
22. Table of Contents NEVES CUMS OU Renan me ane 1 2 Data Ae RINT 2 2 1 Type of the scattering ON Ca gcc ssa teri retrace pedes 2 2 2 SNBB ln ee ae 9 2 2 1 Forward Distance Fwd aene ne 3 2 2 2 Sideways Distance Sdw in dust init 3 2 2 3 Size of th IN cars eae eee 3 2 2 3 1 Length Height Bottom Height aacco ooo rere rere nus 4 2 2 3 2 Sheet size from the SCATT UK file sss 5 2 2 4 Rotation Angle Rot 2 2 nn nie Qo conci ins 5 2 2 5 Tilt angle of the sheet Tilt 525858 tinet n etre 6 2 2 6 Reflection Factor 6 2 9 Wire section CMM ac cts cO Ron aa e e EER 7 2 3 1 Forward Distance NW un ie nas 7 2 3 2 Sideways Distance SAW lis tiere nre end 7 2 2 4 Length of the wire section Logt 7 2 2 5 Diameter of each wire d 2228 ee mate 8 2 2 6 Height of the wire above the ground Hgt ll 8 22 Rotation Angle TROL cece ieee nn aee occae aces 8 2 2 8 Number of single wires ccccceesseecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeteees 9 2 2 9 Reflection Factor oti rc UID 9 22 Ege p M 10 24 1 Forward Distance PO 10 2 4 2 Sideways Distance SAW 10 2 4 3 Length of the ridge Lal ain 11 2 4 4 Angle of edge front Rot ccccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 11 2 4 5 Height above GP Zer
23. UN 2005 Software Appendix 2 Files in the AXIS 330 RWY SHEET DIST OK DATA TABL GRAPH 3D SBO CSB CRS CLR bbp BBP Ampl Phase Current file name DATA XL CR or enter new Offset all sheets Forwards Sideways Upwards User handling THIS VERSION NEEDS A NEW INSTALLATION DISK Not Licensed for NetWork use Start it in the AXIS directory The SoftWare has detected a change since registration Please re enter the user code to enable usage Contact supplier for Registration Code Enter User Code Incorrect PassWord ACCESS DENIED Contact Network Manager Error messages The Software is not installed properly Use the installation Diskette file is missing Sorry not enough memory available for this Printer is not Connected to the Computer file has wrong format File Directory not Found A fatal error has occurred If necessary report the following information along with a description of how it happened Program Name Program Date Error Number Error Location File Reference Hit any key Restart the program F6 key recalls data file is not found on Disk o ox HotO Computed on Printer NOT connected or turned on RF Frq GP FSL SSL RWY Rtc Rts Phx ClrA ClrD SBOA SBOP Ant Height Offs Fwd shift Azim CSBA CSBP SBOA SBOP Ampl Phase Fly Right Fly Left Elmt Gnd Scatter object on test tail Lgt Hgt BtmHgt Rot Tilt Rfl Tested fo
24. a 19 5 4 59 27 EN B B 16 8 3 96 25 756 80 B aA 14 7 3 45 23 CT B aa 13 8 3 ibd i kit ang bey Fig GND601 The table output of the ground current AXIS 330 NANCO GND 8 20 OCT 1997 Soa Ground Current Mode 7 Graphic Display 7 1 Graphic diagrams 7 1 1 Two dimensional graph The two dimensional graph calculates the current along a line parallel to the runway centerline at a selected distance from the GP centerline showing the current in dB s The OdB level is a Cat III limit value that will produce a diffracted signal at the edge yielding 2uA bends If there is a secondary reflection plane below and beyond the truncation the reflected diffracted signal will add to it and make a worst case of 4uA bends CCE bon SH Groma Carmen Ba FLESH FZlIneeet IFA Print F4lX amp uk Fig GND701 Typical 2D graph of the M array SBO ground current AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 GND 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 1 2 Three dimensional graph The three dimensional graph makes similar calculations along many parallel lines side by side All calculations are made 50m apart in a grid pattern The currents are shown as linear values rather than dB s to give a better visual view of the current distribution on the reflection area Showing the ground current is useful to determine whether a reflection plane area is sufficient to reflect the entire distributed ground current and will also indicate which area is s
25. check the ASS0LNG NEW file for information on changes in the language files GP10 UK GP11 UK and GP12 UK They contain all text information on the screen Other language files should be updated by editing them according to the information in the mentioned file Access code The AXIS 330 is delivered with different access levels to run the different items MODES in the Main Menu Each mode has its Access Code which is included in the User Code that is entered at the first time If higher Access Code has been given after the Software has been taken into use delete the present Code by using the F3 key SetUp in the Control Panel and use F5 Delete User Code command from the SubMenu Restart the software and enter the new User Code The User Code Access Level is in the scrambled GP 001 file GEN 12 20 JUN 2005 AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software General 7 System Configuration 7 1 Display Screen VGA screen 640 x 480 is supported 7 2 Printer Drivers The GP BAT batch file that starts up the software first loads a graphic printer driver enabling the graphics to be printed on an IBM GRAPHICS compatible like an Epson dot matrix printer For other printer types the printer driver must be set up for the actual printer type by modifying the GP BAT file using a text editor Detailed description about printer drivers is in appendix 4 AX4 7 3 The Default Setup When star
26. side regardless if the GP antennas are located on the left hand or right hand side of the RWY See fig CPN302 The hotkey lt Alt S gt toggles the slope between degrees or percent AXIS 330 NANCO Software CPN 8 20 AUG 1994 Control Panel Fig CPN302 The Sideways Slope and Runway Distance 3 1 6 Runway Distance RWY Dist m The RWY Dist is the distance between the GP mast and the runway centerline See fig CPN302 3 1 7 Reflection Plane Refl Pln The Reflection Plane is defining a ground type in the reflection plane The reflection plane of the GP site will in practice absorb some of the RF energy before reflecting it The absorption is depending on the electrical properties of the ground as well as the reflection angle This parameter has an impact on the reflection factor of the ground plane de pending on the incident angle of the signal It will also effect the penetration depth ofthe signals and hence the effective antenna heights Note The value of the penetration depth is shown on the upper right hand side of the screen Pin Dpth representing the effective reflection plane where the antenna heights should be referenced Subtract this value from the calculated heights to get the real ones The ground type selection of the reflection plane are Type Penetration Depth PERFECT 0 0cm SALT WATER 0 5cm FRESH WATER 0 7cm SOAKED SOIL 2 0cm MOIST EARTH 3 0cm GR
27. 1 2 Compute New lt F3 gt The Compute New command is activated by F3 and is used to compute new reflecting plane by entering measured terrain heights First the user is asked to enter start stop and step distance AXIS 330 NANCO UTL 10 20 AUG 1994 Tm Utilities RPL slope calculation Note If Enter is pressed with no name the AXIS 330 uses the first RPL files that is shown on the screen Dates SEIT FRO RE ReFlerties Flees Weit Time CFE LR File CPiMDOeajste Meu HiHat ispe CR gt 0ait ftrt Peruard Distmere ta ftep Peruse Distasere Caf B Step PerusEA Distaste Car f Fig UTL404 Terrain data range and step for entering measured values Secondly the user is asked to enter every measured terrain point by means of distance and height ARTE 339 RE Bef lect on Flann linit Entering from Be gt 38e F Or Sidelagz Foint Hn 32 f x ido I Preaa CE t accept valus Enter knight imi amp Bi te Fremzz CR to zkip input Fig UTL405 Measured terrain data entry screen This is repeated as long as the stop distance is reached Note If the user does not have any height value of the stepped point this point can be skipped just pressing enter After all terrain points are entered the next screen will appear and the user is asked to enter the weight distance baseline The point where the average cal culation is changed weighted one The default value is depending on the GP angle and the FSL
28. 20 AUG 1994 AX3 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual K Kill Same as delete Kts Knots Nautical Miles per hour 1 83km h LAT Latitude Trace mode section of this manual Lgt Length LLZ Localiser LPDA Log Periodic Dipole Antenna M ARRAY MCU Monitor Combining Unit MOD Modulus Modulus The maximum possible bend amplitude along an approach if the reflected SBO signals arrive in the worst possible phase relationship to the direct CSB signal Also called the envelope of the bend pattern NULL REF Two antennas GP type basic type GP where the lower antenna A1 radiates the CSB and the upper A2 the SBO Optimize Optimized GP is the M ARRAY system where the ampli tude and phase relation is slightly adjusted so that the SBO and CSB illumination towards reflection object or dicontinuities in the reflecting plane is suppressed in order to reduce the occuring bends created by the reflect ing signals ORB Orbit mode section of this manual P PLY RePlay the Screens section of this manual PHI Phase PHX Pos Position Reflection plane R efl P In AXIS330 NANCO AX3 4 20 AUG 1994 Software Appendix 3 RPL RF RFL Rot r s RT RTC RTS RWY RX SBOA SBOP SCA SDM SDW SET Sense SIDEBAND REF SNS Reflection PLane Radio frequency Reflection Object or reflection factor Rotation Radians per Second Runway Receiver SideBands Only The 90 Hz and 150 Hz modulated in opposite AF phases Amplitude and ph
29. Angle FWD SlopeSDW SlopeRWY Dist Refl Pln Ratio RTC gt RTS gt PHX CLR Ampl CLR CDI RX Type RWY Element Type Scatters Snow Pln Dpth Antenna from TX Errors Thr dist Thr hgt RDH A B Step hgt MCU diff ADU Outp A2 probe Al probe Dist Hgt Sdw SBO Ampl PhaseMCU OutputCSB CLR GP LEFT RIGHT Ant Height Offset FWD shift AZ turn NFmon Phase link Fl Help F2 DOS F3 Setup F4 Util F5 New F6 Last F7 File F8 Scatt F9 Snow F10 End Jan FebrMar Apr May JuneJulyAug SeptOct Nov Dec Are You Sure Y N PERFECT SALT WATER FRESH WATER SOAKED SOIL MOIST EARTH GRAVEL DRY SAND CONCRETE NULL REF SIDEBAND REF M ARRAY CEGS ISOTROPIC 1 2 L DIPOLE NORMARC LPDA KATHREIN 2L THOMSON CSF WILCOX 3 DPL NO YES Menues MENU Select Mode by Number or Arrow keys Playback Screen files Lateral Trace Vertical Trace Window Overview Approach Fixed Position Ground Current Bend Analysis Sensitive Area Current MODE NORM DUMMY Tx SBO Phase ADU adjustments GP Type Scatterers RX response Print FF Active SHOW Dir Description Enter new Text HardCopy of Results Y or CR Scale center offset Scale center Full scale fi F2 Change F3 Text F5 Errors F10 Menu lt CR gt Continue Alt C CLR hit any key F1 B amp W F2 Invert F3 Print F4 Save F8 Scatter Values spare points loaded F10 to break Carrier FLY DOWN FLY UP spare Toggles Erase Data for new run AXIS330 ONANCO AX2 8 20
30. Blue 5 Magenta 9 Light Blue 2 Green 6 Brown 10 Light Green 3 Cyan 7 Light Grey 11 Light Cyan 12 LightRed 13 Light Magenta 14 Light Yellow 15 White AX2 6 20 UN 2005 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Appendix 2 Files in the AXIS 330 6 The file GP12 UK The text file GP 12 UK has a certain format which is important to observe when translating into anotherlanguage Comments are written in this documentin Italics and do not appear in the file itself but are shown for guidance The file consists of a number of sections each headed by a textline between square brackets These serve as identifiers for the software and mustnotbe translated or modified The following items are some important rules 1 Theline order mustnotbe changed within each section butthe sec tions themselves headed by a square brackettext may appearany where in the file 2 Thecontentofthe Square Brackets mustnotbe changed as itserves as identifiers to the software 3 Sometextlines are divided into several text label parts and each label word mustalways begin on the given position on the line 4 Mo X type headings indicate the textin run mode number X from the menu E g Mo 1 contains all textin the Playback mode since P lay backis the 1st menu item 5 To X type headings give the text and action keys on the Toggle Pan els in run mode number X The characters between brackets e g the A in A dd will automatically be the key to be pressed to e
31. Control Panel by using the lt F3 gt key See SET section 3 5 4 Bends The bends are composed of static and dynamic bends The default bend limits are the maximum allowed amplitudes when there are no present static bends on the site This is hardly true in practical cases and the value of the present static bends caused by fixed installations must be taken into account The maximum bend limit will be the geometric sum of the static and the dynamic bends Static Bends Static bends uA lt 0 The bend amplitude caused by fixed installation on the site Note It should be remember that all fixed reflection objects are removed in Sensitive Area mode AXIS 330 NANCO SNS 10 20 MAR 2002 Software Sensitive Area Mode Limit of Dynamic Bends Limit of bend uA 4 gt The maximum allowed dynamic bend amplitude caused by the moving scatter object on the simulation Also the command F4 allow to enter this limit The dynamic bend limit will be DynBend MaxBend StatBend SNS 1 where MaxBend maximum allowed bend amplitude StatBend static bend amplitude from fixed objects Note Maximum bend value is depending on category and is shown be tween brackets The AXIS 330 will suggest but not set the dynamic bend value as it will use 4L A as default The Dynamic Bend can be also set by the F4 3 5 5 Description text Description Enter new Text gt Entry for the description string to
32. Data 5 45 svat salen corsets ere e metre menu ete 3 7 1 SBO amplitude from cabinet 3 7 2 SBO phase from cabinet 3 8 Threshold Data 3 8 1 Threshold Distance 3 8 2 Threshold Height 3 8 3 Threshold Crossing Height 3 8 4 Step Height ssssssssssssseeeeneneeneeenes 4 7 1 Load F2 4 7 2 Save F3 4 7 QKilleE4 ii t ete PIDE 4 7 4 New directory lt F5 gt ss 4 7 5 Description F7 4 7 6 Create new directory F8 AFS S6atbi oem npe ec e e dere dE 49 F9 SNOW iu acte MOREM ERI e AME e en E Re 4 10 F10 End 5 Hot Keys 6 Main Menu ues eESII OPER eI PAUCI CPN ii 20 AUG 2002 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Control Panel 1 Description The Control Panel is the most important screen in the glidepath simulation con taining all electrical and mechanical data of the current glidepath system All data input parameters or settings are entered with arrow keys to change the values or introduce system errors directly on the screen Any phase and ampli tude change can be adjusted as well as any mechanical alignment of each indi vidual antenna All input parameters are loaded from the default setup file and can be changed by the user AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 CPN 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Screen layout The Control
33. F8 key or by S catter toggle The S catter toggle will load preprogrammed sheets representing the tailfin of the aircraft One S catter toggle option is called FREE and this can be set by F8 key The F8 key will open the Scattering Object Editor for the sheet entry without the entry of the position of the object See SCA section WARNING All previously set scattering objects will be removed The default scattering sheet is 10m wide and 20m high based on ground level For aircraft tails the sheet should be lifted from the ground by setting the Btm Hgt to a greater than zero Simulating the building cranes can be set in a similar way The beam height will be approximately 1 2m the length could be 20 50m and the Btm Hgt 10 40m The horizontal rotation of the sheet can be setto a certain value but is not neces sary if the Worst case toggle is used Note that a positive value rotates clock wise The tilt option is not used in establishing the sensitive area The reflection factor option may be used if the object does not have a smooth metallic surface A metallic grid with mesh width smaller than 0 1 lambda 0 09m can also be considered to be a smooth reflecting surface For wider grid or uneven surfaces made of concrete or glass the reflection factor could be set to values between 0 5 0 95 Simulating an aircraft is sufficiently done by modelling the tailfin since this gives the dominant contribution to the be
34. FZ Iwert Far let Filiae Fig WND701 The Window Diagram with one scattering object Flight Inspection can obtain the window diagram by making level run at 8 Azimuth in addition to a centred one at the localiser course line Even better resolution is obtained if 4 are included AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 WND 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 1 Null Reference Window Diagram In a Nominal Window Diagram for a Null Reference Glidepath system is shown in Fig WND702 The Course Line OuA line is absolute straight across the Window coverage parallel to the terrain side slope The lower FLY UP lines will bend slightly downwards at each side due to the phase errors between the antennas caused by the impact of the lateral antenna offset Hinka seen Troa the Gnd I0808A Bes U HI DOS Type MULL REF CDI pA CDI 4 275 4 171 158 3 751 7 3 357 8 2 558 75 2 628 158 2 244 198 2 82h 225 1 H24 J306 1 322 Half sector Tain 8 353 Twp 80 359 Hainall B rer GP TF1BBEd CF2 invert FA3IPrint Fa rear fit KATHREIM ZL Elevation angles 0 5 B 4 143 4 156 3 735 3 758 3 381 3 572 3 65665 3 eh 2 639 2 6352 2 285 2 28 2 095 2 8038 1 H5H 1 828 1 373 1 327 z Man B 35 B 3n01 8 508 8 361 8 506 AXIS 330 Fig WND702 Nominal Window Diagram for a Null Reference GP When looking at the antennas from above the lateral offset of antenna A1 will act like the antennas are d
35. First part of data entry in bend mode 3 1 Approach path location and option selection 3 1 1 Approach Elevation Angle Approach Elevation Angle lt 3 gt Enter the elevation angle which was used during the run to be analysed 3 1 2 Sideways Offset Sideways Offset lt 122 The distance from the GP mast to the approach path normally the runway cen terline A zero means the flight took place directly towards the GP mast Negative values are towards the runway 3 1 3 Option Selection F2 Make Bends CR Analyse Bends This is the end of the first part of the data entry and the second part of the data entry depends on the selected option Press the F2 key for Make Bend option or Enter for Analyse Bend option AXIS 330 NANCO BND 4 20 AUG 1994 De Bend Analysis Mode 3 2 Analyse Bends Option At first in this option is asked how many bend points will be entered and after that it is asked to enter every point Foint Ho 1 Fiotanoe to Bend Center Bend Wave length Folint Ko g Eiotanoe to Bend Center Bend Wauelength Font Ho a Fiotanoe to Bend Center Bend Wave length Fig BND302 Data entry for Analyse Bends Option 3 2 1 Number of Bend Points Number of Bend Points 6 max lt 3 gt Enter the number of bend point from a flight inspection approach curve to be entered The next two items will be repeated for each point Note If higher number than 6 is entered the maximum number
36. JUN 2005 GEN 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 4 2 Installation Theinstall program creates AXIS subdirectory on your harddisk and puts the batch file AL BAT on root directory Installation program INSTALL BAT will copy all necessary files to the harddisk in the AXIS directory WARNING If you already have the file named AL BAT in your root it will be overwritten without warning Procedure 1 Click the Start menu select RUN and type emd or command 2 Insert the CD into the D drive or any relevant drive letter 3 Type D lt enter gt 4 Type D gt cd A330 lt enter gt 5 Type DAA330 install c lt enter gt Wherec is the drive letter Example install c installs to c drive install d installs to d drive 5 5 Starting the AXIS 330 first time First time you run the software the user code must be entered This code is dif ferent for each user and the registered access level and is found in the attached registration letter that comes with the software You will only be asked for this code at the first time you are running the AXIS 330 on your machine 5 6 Running the AXIS 330 The software is started through the file GP BAT that loads a printer driver into the computer memory before loading the AXIS 330 software To start running you just run the GP BAT file by typing GP and Enter Another but less recommended method is to let a menu program start the GP BAT file WARNING Itis not rec
37. Load F3 Save F4 Kill F5 New directory lt Spare gt Enter new directory lt CR gt Default Work directories Select by PgUp PgDn This directory does not exist F8 to make F8key List of Scattering Objects Obj Type Fwd Sdw Lgt Hgt d Hgt II Rot Tilt Rfl Opt Setup F2 Add F3 Delete F4 Remove all F5 Sort F6 List F7 Optimize CR CtrlPan Enter data for object or CR to exit AXIS330 ONANCO AX2 10 20 UN 2005 Software Appendix 2 Files in the AXIS 330 New Object CR if finished entering R idge S heet T op Wire wire G round Height Above GP Zero F2 Ang Vertical Angle F2 Hgt No Depth m Er Enter thickness Bottom Layer Snow Layers Depth amp Dielectric Constant Layer Depth r F9key lt CR gt to select antenna system lt Esc gt to cancel No files found MO 1 Playback Mode Files directory Usage Speed PgUp Step Back PgDn Step Ahead F2 Invert F10 Quit F2 Show F4 Delete all F5 New directory F6 To DOS lt CR gt Return Show directories Select by PgUp PgDn Enter new directory CR Default No screen files available This directory does not exist F8 to make MO 2 Lateral Trace Range to circle SDW Distance MIN az angle MAX az angle Increment F2 Multiple runs Elevation angle Monitor Fwd Sdw Hgt SBO amp CSB Ampl Twds RWY Number of runs 1 6 FWD Dist of run No To 2 d B or D isplay
38. Manual 5 Commands 5 1 F2 Change The Change command is used to modify the values of the numeric data used in the computation See chapter 3 Numeric Data Entry of this section 5 2 F3 Text Quick command to enter text description into the graph See para 3 7 of this section 5 3 F4 FSD Graph Full Scale Deflection FSD x 800 400 200 100 50 25 12 6 uA Default value is 50uA 400uA in Level Run on the full vertical scale but can be changed to any of the indicated values Move the cursor with the Left Right arrow keys and press CR 5 4 F6 Excel Note This command is only shown and enabled when the Display toggle is selected as a TABL With this command you can generate an Excel readable file When the F6 is pressed the AXIS 330 ask the name of the file as follows Current file name DATA XL CR or enter new The default name is DATA XL Type a new name or just press Enter to keep the default name The name must be according to the DOS specification other wise it will be truncated name 8 letters and extension 3 letters After the file name is entered this command will be shown as a filename between angle brackets To disable this function press F6 again and the original com mand text F6 Excel is displayed 5 5 F10 Menu Function key lt F10 gt returns the program execution into the main menu 5 6 Continue CR Starts the vertical trace mode run AXIS
39. Note FULL option will take a lot of computing time may be necessary if the antenna element diagrams has significant sidelobes in azimuth AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 MAR 2002 SNS 13 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 Commands 5 1 F8 Scattering Sheet The F8 key is used to set scattering sheet values of the Scatter toggle FREE option 5 2 1 Scan Area This command is activated by the 1 key number one allowing to enter or change the scan area settings Note This command cannot be activated if there are computed results in the memory In this case you first have to erase the memory content by Erase toggle 5 3 2 Display This command is activated by the 2 key number two allowing to enter or change the graph range or the location of the runway and the taxiway 5 4 3 RX Position or Track Press the 3 key number three to activate this command which allows you enter or change the receiver data values Note This command cannot be activated if there is a computed result in the memory In this case you have to erase the memory content first by Erase toggle 5 5 F2 Change The F2 command allows you enter or change the data values of the computa tion parameters 5 6 F3 Text The F3 is used to enter text line description to be shown on graph 5 7 F4 Limit of Bend The F4 is used for fast setting of the maximum bend limit 5 8 F6 DATA XL To name and save a DATA file for fu
40. Trace Mode 4 6 S ense Selection for the sense direction in CDI graphic 900 Fly Down is in the upper part of the graphic 900 Fly Down is in the lower part of the graphic 4 7 M ultiple This toggle is used to select single or multi trace output F2 there is only one FWD distance entered Use F2 to make more NO there are more FWD distances entered but only the first one is displayed Press M to switch to YES YES all entered FWD distances of the traces will be displayed Press M5 to switch to NO AXIS 330 NANCO ds ERREEN LAT 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 Commands 5 1 F2 Change The Change command is used to modify the values of the numeric data used in the computation See chapter 3 Data Entry of this section 5 2 F3 Text Quick command to enter text description into the graph See 3 7 of this sec tion 5 3 F4 FSD Graph Full Scale Deflection FSD x 800 400 200 100 50 25 12 6 uA Default value is 50uA 400uA in Level Run on the full vertical scale but can be changed to any of the indicated values Move the cursor with the Left Right arrow keys and press CR 5 4 F6 Excel Note This command is only shown and enabled when the Display toggle is selected as a TABL With this command you can generate an Excel readable file When the F6 is pressed the AXIS 330 ask the name of the file as follows Current file name DATA XL CR or enter new The default na
41. UP a y ce ers tice ioter ESTEE ERSE da dent Sav nes pate tebe eee aie e RX 5 0rad s 105kts Achieved GP DATUM Actual GP DATUM 2 99 15 52m 2 99 15 37m F19 B amp U FZ Invert F3 Print F4 Save F8 Scatter lt Values gt Fig APP702 Distance and parameter reading of the cursor location AXIS 330 NANCO APP 14 20 OCT 1997 Soltware Approach Mode The curve tracing function includes also an automatic point loader for learning bend analysing This tutorial feature is used in the following way 1 Finda maximum middle or minimum point on a bend section and press the 0 zero key The distance will read zero because this point is now set as a reference A further move of the cursor will display the relative distance from the reference point Systen for document CDI Approach El 3 00 Az 20 0 Sdw 122m Om O OONM gt 3 26pA FSD 5OpA Ctr OpA Bci 2 or 4 R 22 le aA IP a BE aeree ere eset reete N EE E a RX 5 0radzs 105kts Achieved GP DATUM Actual GP DATUM 2 99 15 52m 2 99 15 37m aar ro FZ Invert F3 Print F4 Save F8 Scatter lt Values gt Fig APP703 Graphic Screen after 0 key pressed 2 Move the cursor either a full half or quarter bend cycle and then press 1 one for full cycle or less accurate 2 two for half cycle or 4 four for quarter cycle most accurate This will load the bend distance length combination into the bend ana ly
42. Up 150 uA Fly Up 190 uA Fly Up the ICAO defined 0 22 DDM 225 uA Fly Up 300 uA Fly Up Note Positive values means FLY UP sense 3 Elevation angles 3 This part of the screen shows the exact value of the vertical angles measured from the GP zero horizontal line in 0 and 8 azimuth angles 4 Half sectors 4 This part of screen shows the computed half sector widths 75uA FD and 75uA FU at 0 and 8 azimuth angles WND 8 20 AUG 1994 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Window Overview Mode 6 2 Three dimensional graphic Pressing the W in the data panel W in 3D toggle the AXIS 330 jumps to the vertical trace mode and changes some toggles over there ARTS 338 ILE GLIBEFRTH GIPHLATOR 46H01 8005 iT ine lurtircal Trace Eraxu Bate for new run Fi Birtanrm Er EHF Bistance i22m RIK Angle 28 lt Airglitude RAK Angle 5 86 CBodirplag Increment p lg Erasun Incr x Buzrri ptinn Bocumun zgx num Piarancter hanse thule ipin Higit scale Wind 3 3E Fig WND602 The vertical trace data panel after jumped from Window mode WARNING USE ONLY P arameter and W nd toggles Other toggles will break the connection to the Window overview mode and the AXIS 330 starts to behave as in vertical trace mode Parameter toggle includes now five selections CDI 4 CSB SBO and Phase The Parameter selection 4 will show CDI CSB SBO and Phase on the same screen FIHAN FZ le
43. absorb some of the RF energy before reflecting it The absorption is depending on the electrical prop erties of the ground as well as the reflection angle The reflection factor of the ground plane depends on the incidentangle of the signal The reflection plane type also effects the penetration depth of the signals and hence the effective antenna heights Reflection Factors _ oo 3 1 Perfect Saltwater Freshwater E u u iT m X Maist earth Dr earth 9 Dr sand 10 12 14 15 18 20 22 24 26 Ref Angle deg Fig AX1 301 Reflection factors of different ground types 3 4 Penetration Depth The signal atthese frequencies will penetrate into the ground at an average depth thatis depending on the earth electromagmetic properties Research and separate computations have given us a thumb setrules applied in AXIS 330 Based on that we have seta 7mm increment in penetration depth for each type of ground material selected This depth displayed on the Control Panel in cm should be subtracted from the antenna heights when measuring them from the average top of ground 3 5 Snow layers Snow layers are in this release only simulating very wetsnow reflecting all signal atthe top surface The epsilon dielectric constant is therefore forced to 80 water for all layers In a later release this can be setto any value together with the proerties of the ground froze
44. amplitude SBO Course SBO amplitude Phas Course Phase between CSB and SBO C CDI Clearance deviation in uA C CSB Clearance CSB amplitude C SBO Clearance SBO amplitude C Phas Clearance Phase between C CSB and C SBO SEI ERA ILE ULINEPSTS EIHSLATOR CECHIBUB Cw EH RENTE TEH FEU Phase 12 m8 7 197 4 I Th 12 2 1 197 4 T1 Th ii Ba d 197 4 i TE TE 18 ma i f 197 4 1 75 75 ind i17 197 4 1 5 74 E inn H FF 197 4 i F4 7 104 8 71 197 4 1 15 94 ina n 197 4 B me TE JAA 8 197 4 6 75 TE ina i FE 197 4 p FE i nm 3 14 197 4 B F TE F 0A 3n 197 4 p i FE nn 3n 197 4 n tS BBA 8 HF 197 4 Bor DET ia aS 157 4 Bp DET zm B iid 1957 4 B S nE z mnn 8 17 197 4 B F nEE hit amy Key aaa Fig FIX601 The typical screen for table display results of the fixed posi tion mode for antenna A3 phase error AXIS 330 FIX 10 NANCO 20 OCT 1997 Software Fixed Position Mode 7 Graphic Display When the Display toggle is selected as a GRAPH the computed results will be displayed as a graphic diagram 7 1 Graphic Diagram The graphic diagram includes all information that is set in data panel On the second line is shown the position of the fixed points In the upper right hand part of the graph can be seen the correlation factor and the response ratio in case of two fixed points are entered Additionally on the bottom row there are four functions available enabling the handle the graph result
45. angle 12 28 H Inrzurant Bp igm BED center L2 Bexb ull scale 41 i BRNE WEE cr spt ann LF LB Flagtack hryuugn Esluxi En Fig LAT201 The Data Screen of the Lateral Trace Mode 2 1 Table of Numeric data 1 The numeric data shows the values to be used in the computation The numeric data can be changed by the F2 change command Here is a brief description of the table of numeric data Range to circle SDW Distance Elevation angle MIN az angle MAX az angle Increment Scale Center Full Scale Description Note Orbit radius from the Runway Point of Intersection RPI Sideways distance from GP zero The selected elevation angle The start azimuth angle The stop azimuth angle The step or increment angle along the orbit The graph display center in uA or ddm The graph display full display in uA or ddm The text line displayed on the graph screen The Scale Center and Full Scale are seen only when the D isplay toggle is selected as a GRAPH AXIS 330 LAT 2 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Lateral Trace Mode 2 2 Toggle panel 2 The toggles are used to make some quick selections and include the settings for the output form of the computation The toggle panel includes the following toggles A mplitude Selection between and dB D isplay Selection between graph and table E rase Selection between old and new data I ncr x Selection for the
46. be shown on the graph Note This entry can be set also with F3 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 MAR 2002 SNS 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 Toggles 4 1 A dd NO Only the dotted grid with 100m square is shown in the graph RWY The runway with a taxiway is drawn on the graph R amp D Both the runway and a distance scale are shown DIST A distance scale along the x axis is displayed in the graph 4 2 T rack Rx This toggle is used to set the track options for different test conditions PtC The receiver is positioned in ILS point C A B The receiver follows a track from ILS point A to point B A C The receiver follows a track from ILS point A to point C A T The receiver follows a track from ILS point A to point T also named the ILS Reference Datum Height IRD or RDH The Bend Limit is set by default to 4uA NOTE The second Track Option A B represents the case when operating under Low Visibility Procedures For computing the sizes for sensi tive areas in Cat Il amp Ill conditions this will be the correct setting The subsequent settings where the end point is closer to the runway than Pt B are for testing the theortical effect on the signals in the specified usable tracks for Cat I and III 4 3 E rase OK means there are no DATA from the last computed sensitive area in the memory A new area may now be computed DATA means the memory still contains the last result and the area may be displayed again with a
47. between CSB and SBO ARTS 338 ILE GLIBEFERTH GIPHLATOR 46 1000 Tinni Las CBI Cg CEE BED Fhazu 6 98 13 2 176 8 5 97 266 h h 14 86 175 3 5 34 255 6 68 12 BH7 176 6 5 41 266 6 75 12 69 176 9 5 24 255 Hh 12 61 197 1 5 26 266 6 65 12 34 177 4 5 22 32h55 h hi if i 177 7 2 20 266 6 66 11 99 177 9 6 17 256 h 11 H2 178 2 5 14 25h 11 h4d 170 4 5 11 256 6 48 11 47 178 7 5 84 2566 h 35 11 38 172 8 5 86 256 h 11 14 179 2 5 83 256 h 18 179 5 4 99 256 h 18 179 7 4 96 256 6 15 i d 188 8 4 93 256 6 18 18 d4H 1HB 2 4 99 257 bit any pres ao Fig LAT601 The typical screen for table display results of the lateral trace mode AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 LAT 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 Graphic Display When the D isplay toggle is selected as a GRAF the computed results will be shown as a graphic diagram 7 1 Graphic Diagram The graphic diagram includes all information that is set in data panel Additionally on the bottom row there are six functions available for handling or examining of the graph results ysta for docesent Lateral Trece Ped 1350m is 1i 2a CDI ipu Fa sip Cir din FLY MH d t FLY UP der LFP AF dlnuert F3iPrint F kiana lt a lees Fig LAT701 The typical graphic diagram for the CDI parameter At the bottom of the graph the distance range and lateral offset of the center point of the arc are s
48. different value and press Enter to proceed to the next data entry Note All entries can be edited afterwards 2 1 Type of the scattering object The AXIS 330 simulates five types of scattering objects The selection of scatter type is made by F2 through lt F6 gt All other keys will return the program execution to the point where the scattering object was called There are five types of the scattering objects as follows 1 F2 Sheet a rectangular sheet simulating walls of buildings con structions or aircraft tailfins etc 2 F3 Wire a wire section simulating power or telephone lines 3 F4 Ridge a ridge simulating an earth wall or a long stretched hill 4 F5 Top a semispheric terrain object simulating hills or any other limited sized object 5 F6 Ground a ground truncation simulating a discontinuity of the re flection plane Note Only one ground truncation F6 can be entered and this MUST be entered as the first object From the second object this F6 option will disappear from the list Date AXIS 338 ILS GLIDEPRTH SIMULATOR S N 888 5 Time Enter data for object 1 or CR to exit CF2 gt Sheet F3 Wire lt F4 Ridge F5 gt Top F6 gt Ground L L F4 L ee Low Fig SCA201 Display for selecting type of the scattering object AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 2 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 2 2 Sheet The scattering type Sheet is used to simulate wall
49. distance ee Lun ne 1 r 1 L 1 L 1 i 1 L L 1 1 GP Fig SCA220 Display for entering the sideways distance of the ridge AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 10 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 2 4 3 Length of the ridge Lgt The default value of the length is 100m Length of Ridge Cm lt i88 _ Fig SCA221 Display for entering the length of the ridge 2 4 4 Angle of edge front Rot The rotation angle of the scattering object is the horizontal angle between the truncation line and the GP centerline The clockwise rotation is entered as a positive value and the negative value represents the counter clockwise rota tion Angle of edge front 89 to RW lt 98 WA __ 1889 i example 135 Ds de ann me o D un ce m mm m on ae Ku Fig 5CA222 Display for entering the rotation angle of the ridge 2 4 5 Height above GP Zero Hgt The height of the scattering object relative to the GP zero can be entered in meters or vertical angle Press F2 to change the entry mode The default height is 10 m Height fibove GP Zero CF2 gt Ang lt L L N GP zero Fig SCA223 Display for entering the height of the ridge AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 S CA 1 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 4 6 Reflection Factor Rfl The reflection factor is the ratio between incident and reflected rf signal The factor depends on the material of the object Gene
50. fig CPN303 This can be changed when optimizing the M ARRAY to a certain terrain 3 2 5 Clearance Amplitude CLRA CLR Ampl The CLR Ampl is the amplitude of the clearance RF signal relative to the nominal CSB amplitude in antenna A1 The nominal value is 2096 but can change depending to the manufacturers The default value is 0 Note In case of CLR is toggled OFF by lt Alt C gt this value is also 0 The following table gives the relationship of CLRA CSB A1 for different RF power levels fed into an average Antenna Distribution Unit ADU when the CSB power is held constant at 5W CLR Pwr W CLR Ampl 26 CLR Pwr W CLR Ampl 26 0 1 9 1 1 1 30 3 0 2 12 9 1 2 31 6 0 3 15 8 1 3 32 9 0 4 18 3 1 4 34 2 0 5 20 4 1 5 35 4 0 6 22 4 1 6 36 5 0 7 24 2 1 7 37 6 0 8 25 8 1 8 38 7 0 9 27 4 1 9 39 8 1 0 28 9 2 0 40 8 CLRA depending on CLR power input to ADU 3 2 6 Clearance Deviation CLRD CLR CDI uA The CLR CDI is the deviation uA in the clearance signal The value is depend ing on each manufacturer and should be checked in the equipment manual The following list indicates some examples Normarc 343 UA m 20 60 CLRA 20 Plessey 343uA m 20 6096 CLRA 2096 Alcatel Thomson 257uA m 25 55 CLRA 3096 Wilcox 686uA m 0 8096 CLRA 20 3 2 7 RX Type RX Type Normal or 51RVIA Select receiver capture effect handling Normal type has a rather steep transition curve while the Collins 51RV1A used in many
51. function is used to toggle the graph between colours and black amp white The F1 key will turn the graph into black background and white lines Repeat ing the F1 key will restore the colour display 7 2 2 F2 Display Inverter F2 Invert This function will invert the colours of the display In the colour display the col ours will be changed to their complementary ones 7 2 3 F3 Printout F3 Print This function allows the feed parameters and the graph to be printed out for documentation purposes Make sure that correct printer driver Grafplus or Gra flasr is loaded before starting the AXIS 330 otherwise no graph will be printed only the text Normally this is done by the GP BAT file Note If you haven t the colour printer it is recommended to change display inverted black amp white mode using F1 and F2 keys before printing 7 2 4 F4 Graph Saver F4 Save Note This function is enabled and displayed only when the screen is se lected as black amp white The Graph Saver is used to save the graphic screen to the disk on a selected SHOW directory The names of the files will be generated automatically and the first save is named as AXGO BAS second AXG1 BAS third AXG2 BAS and so on Before saving go to the Playback menu item on the Main Menu and select the wanted directory by the PgUp PgDn keys See the PLY section The saving format is the basic language BSAVE BLOAD mode enabling the fastest Load and
52. id Forwards n Hi 4BH Sidgimg tm B oz Tiale RAN Height Above GF Zero CFdoRngl 4 375 Labs H BBZRI Fig FIX301 Position of points Data entry screen for fixed points where point 1 SDW is entered as metric and point 2 SDW as angular 3 1 1 Forward Distance Forwards m lt 10000 gt The longitudinal distance between the receiver point and the antenna mast in meters along the GP centerline Note This value must be positive 3 1 2 Sideways Distance Sideways m lt 122 Twds RWY The lateral distance between GP zero and the receiver point in meters The negative sign means the distance is measured towards the runway from the GP antenna AXIS 330 NANCO FIX 4 20 OCT 1997 Software Fixed Position Mode 3 1 3 Height of the Receiving Point The height of the receiving point can be entered either as angular or metric values The F2 is used to toggle between these two entering modes Height above GP zero F2 Angl 531 97 Vertical Angle F2 Hgt 3 00 Height or Vertical Angle of the receiving point is measured from the GP zero level Note 1 The height in meters at long distances will be influenced by the cur vature of the earth and is always referred to the local height above the ground Note 2 The position of the monitor antenna above ground is displayed at the top of the screen The AXIS 330 will automatically preset the height of the monitor into the point no 2
53. ing angle in a cone After entering two or three selected points the software will calculate the incident angle of the reflected signal and project this angle on a flat ground as hyperbolic curves If the reflection object is located near this flat ground these hyperbolic curves will converge at the reflection object If the object is located at a higher position the curves may diverge not cross but lay inside each other or con verge at a different location The next step in analysing the bends will be to interpret the hyperbolic curves It takes a lot of experience on known objects to do this properly Reflection object analysis will often give two solutions to point out of the origin of the reflected signals By using the F2 Make Bends option bend lengths can be computed for differ ent distances when the coordinates of a known reflection object are entered AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 Data Entry The data is entered in two parts 1 approach path location and option selection 2 data entry for bends or reflection object depending on the selected option The present value is always shown between angle brackets Enter new value from the keyboard or press Enter to keep the present value Pate ARTS 338 ILE GLIBEFHTH SIRULATOE iZ W BBEO Time gt n anb Elevation Angle 4 5 a gt EZidewaso of Foes ms 4 122 4FaoRabe Bendo CE Analyze Benda Fig BND301
54. inverted black amp white mode using F1 and F2 keys before printing 7 2 4 Graph Saver F4 Save Note This function is enabled and displayed only when the screen is se lected as black amp white The Graph Saver is used to save the graphic screen to the disk on a selected SHOW directory The names of the files will be generated automatically and the first save is named as AXGO BAS second AXG1 BAS third AXG2 BAS and so on Before saving go to the Playback menu item on the Main Menu and select the wanted directory by the PgUp PgDn keys See the PLY section The saving format is the basic language BSAVE BLOAD mode enabling the fastest Load and play back in the AXIS 330 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 GND 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO GND 12 20 OCT 1997 Software AXIS 330 User s Manual BND Bend Analysis Mode Table of Content 1 DeScriplioris ste net en Pp et ee POR benne Rea pertes 1 2 Analysing DrOG6Ss ent ete det ie 3 Data Entry 5c ne nest 3 1 Approach path location and option selection 3 1 1 Approach Elevation Angle 3 1 2 Sideways Offset A 3 1 3 Option Selection 3 2 Analyse Bends Option 3 2 1 Number of Bend Points 3 2 2 Distance to Bend Center 3 2 3 Bend Wave Length 3 3 Make Bend Option KC FD TOP Tn 3 3 2 F6 Grround cac eerte 3 3 3 Distance
55. item on the Main Menu and select the wanted directory by the PgUp PgDn keys See the PLY section The saving format is the basic language BSAVE BLOAD mode enabling the fastest Load and play back in the AXIS 330 AXIS 330 NANCO BND 16 20 AUG 1994 See Bend Analysis Mode 6 Analysing examples The following examples will show how to analyse when the answer is known In order to show the principal effect of changing the projection level the GP mast is in 6 1 and 6 2 located on the runway centerline 6 1 Reflecting object at near zero height A reflecting point located 1250m directly in front of a 3 GP near the terrain level gives these bend lengths at some distances when flying directly towards the GP system Distance Bendlength 3000m 1302m 2500m 666m 2000m 241m Entering these values give these hyperbolic curves all converging at 1250m forward and Om sideways distance from the GP Fig BND601 Projection of hyperbolic lines for an object in zero level Bend finalysis Track AZ 0 0 Proj level Ga T AXIS 1387 RS Qon 100n diu Fig BND602 Hyperbolic lines for a reflecting point 1250m directly in front of the 3 GP near ground level AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 17 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 2 Reflecting object at 15m height This example describes how to utilize the projection level adjustment We will now change the projectio
56. objects are entered No is displayed instead of a number The number of entered snow layers If no layers are entered No is displayed instead of a number The penetration depth to the effective reflection plane where the antenna heights should be referenced Subtract this value from the heights shown in the Control Panel to getthe real antenna heights above the ground surface Note The value of penetration is depending on the selec tion of the reflection plane type The location of the optimization point measured from the foot of the GP mast Format is FWD SDW Height in meters Note If no optimization is present this line is empty MCU ADU deflection readings is shown in uA CDI or 96 DDM Hotkey Alt D can be used to toggle between these two states MCU and ADU info 4 This infobox is displaying the data values of the MCU and ADU This information is depending on the MCU and ADU settings F4 Util MCU Monitoring Combining Unit simulation angles The MCU shows the simulated integral monitoring signal at three given angles The hotkey Alt D can be used to toggle deflection between and uA This is a very useful tool for checking the theoretical alarm limits to any feed error The MCU will also respond to changes in the clearance signal due to the capture effect between the two carriers The MCU outputs are 3 000 2 64 MCU Diff CLR The signal from the Glide Path channel to the monitor in
57. older planes DC 9 etc and flight inspection units has a slower transition from the stronger to the weaker signal AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 CPN 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 3 GP Side and Antenna Type 3 3 1 GP Side The display shows the runway and the GP mast seen from the ground towards the landing aircraft The default is on the localiser FLY RIGHT side of the RWY The PgUp or lt PgDn gt will toggle the GP side Fig CPN304 GP side of the runway Note The definition of the sign of the sideways distance is always negative towards runway 3 3 2 Antenna Type The Antenna Type is simulated the antenna element radiation diagram with the theoretical gradients nulls and sidelobes in azimuth There are six elements available ISOTROPIC Isotropic omnidirectional 1 2 L DIPOLE Half wave dipole NORMARC LPDA Twin Log Periodic Dipole Antenna LPDA KATHREIN 2L 2 lambda 4x2 dipole array THOMSON CSF CSF2 lambda reflector element WILCOX 3 DPL 3 dipole array with corner reflector 3 4 Antenna mechanical setting The mechanical setting for each antenna element is based on the height the offset the forward shift and the azimuth turn The settings of each antenna can be changed independently to simulate misalignmentin the installation Note The antenna elements are numbered from the lowest antenna to the highest one The lowest one is always A1 See fig CPN303 AXIS 330 NANCO Software CPN
58. practical values Reflection factor kr Object width x height Small metal constructions cars Small vooden shelters Small hill 16 x w vegetation Small hill 18 smooth surface Metal object EH Medium hill w vegetation x x x Medium hill 5B x smooth surface x x Large hill 208 Large hangar 188 smooth surface smooth surface Fig SCA231 Help screen for the reflection factor AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 14 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 2 5 5 Height above second plane Hgt Il The height above a secondary reflection plane beyond the object The default value is zero which means a very rough surface unable to reflect signals Height above second plane If no secondary plane exists press lt CR gt Fig SCA232 Display for entering the height of the second plane Note If there are no secondary plane beyond the object enter zero or just press Enter AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 SCA 15 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 6 Ground The ground truncation is simulating a discontinuity ofthe reflection plane 2 6 1 Forward Distance Fwd The forward distance is the longitudinal distance between the midpoint of the ground edge and the GP mast measured along the GP centerline The minimum distance to the edge should not be less than 200m in order to avoid near field errors in the UTD calculations NOTE Ifthe entered distance is zero the entry is cancelled Forward
59. printer F4 Save Save a B amp W graph for later playback 5 3 1 Black amp White to Colour Selector F1 B amp W This function is used to toggle the graph between colour and black amp white The F1 key will turn the graph into black background and white lines Repeat ing the F1 key will restore the colour display 5 3 2 Display Inverter F2 Invert This function will invert the colours of the display for later grabbing and pasting the figure into a document In the colour display the colours will be changed to their complementary ones 5 3 3 Printout F3 Print This function allows the feed parameters and the graph to be printed out for documentation purposes Make sure that correct printer driver Grafplus or Gra flasr is loaded before starting the AXIS 330 otherwise no graph will be printed only the text Normally this is done by the GP BAT file Note If you do not have a colour printer it is for some printertypes recom mended to change display inverted black amp white mode using F1 and F2 keys before printing 5 3 4 Graph Saver F4 Save Note This function is enabled and displayed only when the screen is se lected as black amp white The Graph Saver is used to save the graphic screen to the disk on a selected SHOW directory The names of the files will be generated automatically and the first save is named as AXGO BAS second AXG1 BAS third AXG2 BAS and so on Before saving go to the Playback menu
60. screens as a slide show AXIS 330 NANCO p Naneo 20 JUN 2005 GEN 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Usage areas The AXIS 330 usage is mainly in these six areas ISetting up guidance The Control Panel shows all physical and electrical settings together with readings from sample probes in the Antenna Distribution Unit This will guide in correct ground setup amp phasing in order to minimize flight inspection time at the commissioning of the installation Il Prediction of signal quality The influence on the signal quality from planned buildings or construc tions at or near the airport area can be predicted by modelling Experi ence in site modelling helps prediction of planned GP system perform ance Ill Finding optimum antenna system Simulation of specific installations in a given airport model to compare the theoretical signal quality with the achieved Flight Inspection re sults By adjusting the model so the simulations resemble the actual results one gets control and understanding of the GP system per formance and behaviour When the model is established the simulator can find the optimum adjustment settings to obtain the best possible signal quality IV Determine sensitive areas Establish sensitive areas for aircraft vehicle movements on taxiways and roads near the GP antennas by simulating the surfaces using rectangular conducting sheets with given sizes and orientations The object will be moved around and optionally
61. shown as the hyperbolic curves in the graphic AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 4 2 Projection level and Graphic scales 2 These data values can be changed with F2 command and represent the initial settings of the graphic In the graphic screen these values can be changed with position adjustment keys See chapter 5 Graph Diagram Projection Level The level where the hyperbolic lines will be projected Max Distance on X scale The end point of the X scale in graphic Min Distance on X scale The start point of the X scale in graphic Sideways offset Lateral offset of the GP mast and the approaching path 3 4 3 Command row 3 The commands effect the program execution or allow to enter some numeric data directly F2 Change Change the initial settings of the projection level and the graphic scales F3 Text Enter a text line to be displayed with the graph diagram F10 Menu Return to main menu lt CR gt Continue Start computing AXIS 330 NANCO BND 10 20 AUG 1994 Software Bend Analysis Mode 4 Commands 4 1 F2 Change data The present value is always shown between angle brackets Enter new value from the keyboard or press Enter to keep the present value Prejertips Lesel ta Hia dictate a E frale UA Rot LN Han distat a E PRDAle m Fieve ef Poet Car lt m Fig BND401 Change data entries in Bend Analysis mode 4 1 1 Projection Level Pr
62. step increment resolution P arameter Selection for the displayed parameter in graphic S ense Selection of the direction of the Y axis FU FD in graphic M ultiple Selection for multiradius orbits 2 3 Command row 3 The command row include commands for data entry and software control F2 Change Activate the numeric data entry F3 Text Entry for the text line to be shown on the graph F4 FSD Entry for the Y scale setting Full Scale Deflection F6 Excel Enables an Excel readable file to be generated Note This command is seen and enabled only when the D isplay toggle is selected for TABL F10 Menu Return to main menu lt CR gt Continue Starts the lateral trace computation 20 AUG 1994 LAT 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 The Data entry The data entry is started by the F2 Change command It allows changing one or more items The present value is always shown between angle brackets Enter new value from the keyboard or press enter to keep the present value In the title row is shown a calculated position of the course line monitor anit FPA IL ULIDEPATE IHELATOUR CEOMIBAB 3 1 Reape te circle ar OS innana Pe EDH Distrett tne x pg TEE Ts AWE Elevation palt v t Fe AIM amp z seule n EE HEE az ele Eu t dz Vat edv t cu p m Graph frale Cesterliss ph ot a gt Descriptises Ester meu Text Tekst Fer Figeres Fig LAT301 Data Entry for lateral trace The range
63. step size is multiplied by 10 with lt Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn gt keys The value of the phase shifters are changed with lt Left Right gt arrow keys Press the F1 key to get more help See fig UTL203 In the MCU Panel M ARRAY there are six adjustable datafields and they can be grouped as follows 1 Monitoring Angle 2 Attenuator for A1 A2 A3 3 Phase Control for A3 and A2 138 27 MOU STIMULATION UNIT ARRAY MCI Seleot oimulation angle 2 265 1 Bo 3 88 FSL B 8e8 fits fa 7 2108 ine 35 Jip 3 640 32 158pM 2 266 fits A3 2 4908 lt 4 ffdg o 2 888 52 45Ho 1 358 fits fi LEN ES 62 3 Ho 8B 9Re 3 Phase AD 9 Phase AZ 0 LI ut put CTRL Fally CTRL Pad Secor Enter gt RETURN FibeQuis Fig UTL202 The MCU Panel adjustments AXIS 330 NANCO DER 20 OCT 1995 MTS AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 2 1 Monitoring Angle 1 The monitoring angle is the elevation angle where the far field conditions are simulated from the pick up loops in each antenna element The angle is adjusted with value stepping keys as described earlier or you can select the angle from the preset table by using the number keys lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt or 5 The proper attenuation and phasing of each pick up is automatically computed when the monitoring angle is changed 2 2 2 Antenna attenuators 2 There are one attenuator in the MCU fo
64. the Display toggle is selected as TABL F10 Menu Return to Main menu lt CR gt Continue Starts the ground current computation AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 GND 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 Data Entry The numeric data are entered by the F2 command allowing to change one or more items The present value is always shown between angle brackets Enter new value from the keyboard or press Enter to keep the present value Bears Biotanoe 4 to otanos i seer Eiotanoe 2D and Tabl Fig GND301 Ground current numeric data entry The data entry is depending on the selection of the Display toggle In the GRAPH and TABL the data entry comprises in the Start distance Stop distance Step distance and Sideways Track Whereas in the 3D selection only the grid spacing is entered The Start and Stop distance are entered in 2D mode In other words if you want to change Stop and Start Distance for the 3D mode you have to select Display toggle as a GRAPH temporarily 3 1 Start Distance Start Distance m 5 gt The distance where the computation will begin the closest to the antenna sys tem The default value is 5m 3 2 Stop Distance Stop Distance m lt 1000 gt The distance where the computation will stop The default value is 1000m AXIS 330 NANCO GND 4 20 OCT 1997 Softwarea Ground Current Mode 3 3 Step size 3 3 1 Step Distance Step Distance m 5 The Step Distanc
65. the program execution into the main menu 5 5 CR Continue Starts the ground current computation AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 GND 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 Table display If the Display toggle is selected as a TABL the computed results will be shown as a list of the parameter values This will also enable an Excel readable file to be saved on the disk if the F6 Excel command key is pressed Before the execution of the list it is asked if the user want to take the results to the printer Hardcopy of Results y or SPACE Enter Y or another letter if the language is not English if the results should be printed out The display will stop while the screen is full and the user is asked to hit any key to continue That will be repeated as long as the all computed results are shown The list includes the following parameters X Distance from the GP mast in meters CDI uA notapplicable CSB CSB amplitude SBO SBO amplitude Phase Phase between CSB and SBO HIG 338 TLS GLIBEFRTH SIMULATOR E H BOR tah ee ChE EE Fhaze 5 88 a SHR 797 45 khi LEN B e 1515 3 119 88 214 185 28 BB 646 8 172 13 14a 155 80 D a 322 4 66 86 187 2g BA B B 1H9 9 49 45 Ha 255 dh BBQ 124 5 31 53 64 385 ia NJ BHT H 21 79 Ca 355 fa 2 28 65 1 15 95 ca dg ger B BR 5E 2 12 18 44 455 08 B Be 49 4 9 58 39 DRS a a aa 32 5 TTF 35 555 20 aa 27 8 6 da 32 17328077 2 28 22 8 5 38 28 655 88 B
66. the theodolite and the GP will not agree in different azimuth angles This is due to the theodolite rotation axis references which are perfectly horizon tal and vertical while the GP reference axis is orthogonal to the reflection plane Example A GP system has 3 0 GP angle and 0 5 FSL The antenna heights are adjusted to a 3 5 GP as this is the angle between the GP angle and the reflection plane in forward direction A theodolite pointing forward to the far field will be set up at 3 0 referenced to the horizontal Looking sideways directly towards the runway the reflection plane is hori zontal but the antenna heights produce a 3 5 GP angle relative to ground plane in that direction too The theodolite will still see 3 0 towards the run way making the measured GP angle look 0 5 too high A similar but opposite effect is observed when the sideways slope SSL is not horizontal AXIS 330 NANCO Software APP 18 20 OCT 1997 Approach Mode Fig APP804 Theodolite error by sloping Reflection Plane 0 5 This error can neither be adjusted nor corrected and the error curve should be computed and used as the reference nominal path Any deviations from this nominal path indicates that something is wrong with the system 8 3 Tilting angle If the elevation angle must be set by mechanically tilting the theodolite use the THEO switch for every start up of the software to enable this function Such theodolites
67. there is a need for sending special printer commands together with the AXIS printouts The reasons could be to preliminary select another paper tray than default or for setting another font type just for this printout AXIS will look for a file called PRTCODE and send its contentto the printer together with the AXIS printout The AXIS directory has an example file named PRTCODEX which contains the Escape codes for a HP laser Ill to select the upper paper tray To activate this file simply rename itto PRTCODE Y our printer handbook gives information of the necessary escape codes for editing your own PRTCODE file Use a simple editor like the MS DOS EDLIN or EDIT to write the ASCII file In orderto write the esc character hold the Alt key down while typing 27 on the numerical pad on the right hand side of the keyboard An arrow character will then appear 20 AUG 1994 A4 3 AXIS User s Manual A4 4 20 AUG 1994
68. undetermined size which reflects the incidentsignal atgiven coordinates with a given reflection factor This factor mustbe determined by the user and depends on the objectsize smoothness and geometrical struc ture Normally a factor will be in the range of 0 01 0 25 The T type model for a hill top is a semispheric pointsize objectre radiating the incidentsignals with a selected reflection factor The effective reflection factor will decrease with increasing azimuth reflection angle from the object This is a com bination of less reflected signal atsteeper reflection angles where the objecthas some loss and the directivity of an average receiver antenna In addition the low pass filtering effect will take place in the receiver depending on the approach speed Less reflected GP Fig AX1 403 Reflection factor will depend on the azimuth angle ofthe reflection AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 AX1 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual The reflection factor will depend on the size surface and geometry of the mod elled object A factor of 0 01 to 0 25 is normally within the practical range A help screen is found using F 1 when entering this factor Reflection factor kr Object width x height S mall metal constructions cars 01 S mall wooden shelters 01 Small hill 10x 5m w vegetation 03 Small hill 10x 5m smooth surface 05 Metal object 10 x 5m 06 Medium hill 50 x 15m w vegetation 10 Medium hill 50 x 15m smoo
69. will point horizontally when turned 90 in azimuth AXIS 330 ONANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 APP 19 AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO APP 20 20 OCT 1997 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS 330 User s Manual FIX Fixed Position Mode Table of Content 1 Description 2 Data Panel 2 1 Fixed point position data 1 2 2 Errot d t 2 eiie eee beet Diete EORR line 2 3 Toggle panel 3 steve he RR PROPRE 2 4 Command row 4 3 The Data Entry 3 1 Position of the point s 3 1 1 Forward Distance 3 1 2 Sideways Distance 3 1 3 Height of the Receiving Point 5 3 2 The Error Data Entry 3 2 1 Error Source and Type 3 2 2 Error range 3 3 1 Start Value of the Error 3 3 2 End Value of the Error 3 3 3 Increment Step of the Error 3 3 4 Scale Center 4 Toggles 4 1 A mplitude 4 2 D isplay 4 3 E rase 4 4 ID ncr x 4 5 N Points 4 6 P arameter Aolle LaO Mu Bil F2 Change 2 8 sn PERIERE A arani haana pen RN SEE 5 2 F3 Text 5 3 F4 FSD 5 4 F5 Errors 5 5 F6 Excel 5 6 F10 2Menu essseseeeneeeneneen 5 7 Continue CR 6 Table display
70. 0 0000 0 0000 122 4 M ARRAY DATA 50 0 50 50 180 0 343 oo0oo0oo0oo Threshold 286 15 0 0 MCU setting Release number Text for display Antenna system NR 1 SBR 2 M 3 Antenna Element Type GP Site on FLY Right 0 Left 1 side of RWY 20 0 or 40 1 Frequency Channels Frequency Glide path angle Forward slope Sideways slope Runway distance Reflection plane type Only if M ARRAY GP Ratio common for RTS and RTC RTS RTC PHX CLR amplitude in of CSB in Al CLR deviation in pA Distance to Threshold m Threshold crossing height m Threshold runway height over GP zero m Step height due to non linear reflection plane Ant Attn PhShift Phaser 3 7 205 180 000 0 000 2 2 489 0 000 0 000 1 0 000 0 000 0 000 2 265 El Ang 0 66 Min Att 3 Mem GP type 3 00 Mem GP ang 0 00 Mem FSL Monitor 80 85 Distance to Monitor m 4 29 Height of Monitor m 0 00 Sideways position of Monitor m AXIS330 ONANCO AX2 4 20J UN 2005 SUIS Appendix 2 Files in the AXIS 330 Modulator 0 Modulation Balance pA 800 Mod Sum 10 x SDM Errors Ant Ampl Phase Turn Sw Sw 0 is antennas switched off by Alt 1 trought Alt 3 3 100 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 100 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 100 0 0 0 0 0 1 SBO Ampl Phase Bal A3 A1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Feeds Ant SBOA SBOPh CSBA CSBPh 3 5 835 180 02 0 000 0 02 2 11 670 0 02 50 000 180 0 1 5 835 180 0 100 000 0 02 Positions Ant Fwd Sdw Hgt 3 0 000 0 378
71. 0 SEP 2006 Software Approach Mode 4 Toggles The toggles allow quick changes to some of the often used settings Press the key shown between the brackets to execute the function If the language is not English the text and the letter within brackets should be different and the com mand will respond to the new letter 4 1 d B or 96 Show amplitude curves as dB or related to the maximum CSB level 4 2 C at Limit Show in the graph the ICAO Annex 10 bend limits 95 for Cat I Il and III 4 3 D isplay Selection for the display mode of the computed results GRAPH graphical output TABL table output 4 4 E rase Selection for erasing the earlier computed data OK the data in the memory has been erased and a new curve may now be computed DATA the memory still contains the last results and the curve may be displayed again with altered toggle settings Press E for new computation 4 5 G raph dir Selection for the displayed direction of the graphic curve direction will be from right to left default direction will be from left to right 4 6 I ncr x Reduce the increment to or 14 of the current one in order to increase the resolu tion when there are short bends on the curve 1 Increment is same as set in table of numeric data V Incrementis divided by two representing double resolution Y Incrementis divided by four 4 7 X scale Selection for distance scale given in meters feet or Nautical
72. 01 Typical Sensitive Area result for the Cat M ARRAY GP with 5uA maximum bends The scattering object is B747 tailfin rotating in 30 steps AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 SNS 15 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 2 Functions The functions of the graphic display are F1 B amp W Black amp White to Colour Selector F2 Invert Display invert the colours for cut amp paste purposes F3 Print Print the curve to a printer F4 Save Save a B amp W graph for later play back 6 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector F1 B amp W This function is used to toggle the graph between colour and black amp white The F1 key will turn the graph into black background and white lines Repeat ing the F1 key will restore the colour display 6 2 2 F2 Display Inverter F2 Invert This function will invert the colours of the display In the colour display the col ours will be changed to their complementary ones 6 2 3 F3 Printout F3 Print This function allows the feed parameters and the graph to be printed out for documentation purposes Make sure that correct printer driver Grafplus or Gra flasr is loaded before starting the AXIS 330 otherwise no graph will be printed only the text Normally this is done by the GP BAT file Note If you haven t the colour printer it is recommended to change display inverted black amp white mode using F1 and F2 keys before printing 6 2 4 F4 Graph Saver F4 Save Not
73. 05 SCA 14 20 JAN 2005 WND 4 20 JAN 2005 SET i 20 NOV 1994 SCA 15 20 JAN 2005 WND 5 20 AUG 1994 SET ii 20 NOV 1994 SCA 16 20 JAN 2005 WND 6 20 AUG 1994 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 FEB 2010 AXIS 330 User s Manual Page WND 7 WND 8 WND 9 WND 10 WND 11 WND 12 WND 13 WND 14 APP i APP ii APP 1 APP 2 APP 3 APP 4 APP 5 APP 6 APP 7 APP 8 APP 9 APP 10 APP 11 APP 12 APP 13 APP 14 APP 15 APP 16 APP 17 APP 18 APP 19 APP 20 FIX i FIX ii FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4 FIX 5 FIX 6 FIX 7 FIX 8 FIX 9 FIX 10 FIX 11 FIX 12 FIX 13 FIX 14 GND i GND ii GND 1 GND 2 GND 3 GND 4 GND 5 GND 6 GND 7 Date 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 OCT 1997 20 SEP 2006 20 SEP 2006 20 SEP 2006 20 AUG 1999 20 SEP 2006 20 SEP 2006 20 SEP 2006 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 200CT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 Date 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 OCT 1997 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 199
74. 12 20 AUG 1994 Control Panel 3 4 1 Antenna height Height m The computed antenna heights are based on the Site Data Note The heights are measured from the effective reflection plane not necessarily top of the ground An alarm will sound to warn you if the value is reduced to less than zero Note If any parameters are changed in the site data group the antenna heights will be recomputed to their nominal values To override this function if not desired use the hotkey Alt L which will lock the lower part of the control panel to avoid automatic recalculation 3 4 2 Lateral offset Offset m The Lateral Offset is the position of the antenna elements and their images on a cylinder arc surface where the cylinder axis is the RWY centerline This will en sure far field conditions all along the localiser courseline down to the ILS Refer ence Datum The Lateral Offset is computed from the inputs of the Site Data FSL and SSL The offset is referred to antenna 2 A2 and displayed in meters and can be ad justedto any value The offset values can be zeroed out by pressing the 0 key zero when one of the offset fields are highlighted by the cursor Note Positive value shows increased distance from RWY centerline and negative value decreased Fig CPN305 The Lateral Offset of the GP antennas AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 CPN 13 AXIS 330 U
75. 12 879 2 0 000 0 000 8 586 1 0 000 0 227 4 293 Optimized 2 Optimize Code 2 Optimized on a point 1500 FWD Distance to point m 122 SDW Distance to point m 1 HGT of point above GP zero m Offset of all sheets X Y Z Om 29m Om Scatters Type Fwd Sdw Lgt Hgt d Hgt II Rot Tilt Rf1 G 500m Om 0 0m 0 0m 2 4m 90 0 0 0g 1 00 R 1200m Om 100 0m 8 0m 9 0m 110 09 0 02 0 11 S 800m 50m 34 0m 14 0m 0 0m 10 0g 2 0g 1 00 T 1000m 40m 0 0m 12 0m 13 0m 0 0g 0 0g 0 10 W 2000m 300m 200 0m 0 01m 10 0m 85 0g 3 wire 1 00 End of file Type G Ground Plane discontinuity generates diffraction Only the first object can be of G type R Horisontal section of a Ridge top S Rectangular sheet of conducting metal T zPointsize Top ofa hill or reflecting construction W Wire section of horisontal metal cylinder s AXIS330 ONANCO Software 20 UN 2005 AX2 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 T he file GP 009 The file GP 009 contains the codes for graphic screen colours Note that the curves are drawn in preset colours so be careful about the background colour by using only numbers between 0 and 8 Use an text editor to make custom colour combinations for the graphics by changing the first number The code below shows the standard colour palette AXIS Graphic Colours o Background 14 Text 1 15 Text 2 Frame 1 Scale spare 15 Scales 11 Limit 1 12 Limit 2 15 Spare 1 15 Spare 1 Code 0 Black 4 Red 8 Dark Grey 1
76. 2NM from THR when the previous aircraft exits the Sensitive Area 3 5 F2 Calculation parameters The data entry for calculation parameters is activated by lt F2 gt key AXIE 338 ILE GLIBEF TH EIBMULATORE CEX MrBERO Timm Tr 2H amp m CI Sim Eri335m Al 7h9 dr Elnuatznn angle 93 33 1 Tbrezbold dixtance im 2865 D Bucuiugr xgaud then dd 1865 tatic bends imha or Limit nf bend Cm d og Bu Enten naw Task I Fig SNS304 Data Entry for the calculation parameters 20 AUG 2002 SNS 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 5 1 Elevation Angle Elevation Angle lt 3 gt Elevation angle of the receiver track normally 3 Note If the elevation angle is changed the receiver position track settings should be changed accordingly 3 5 2 Threshold distance Threshold Dist m 286 The longitudinal distance between the threshold and the GP mast Note If the threshold distance is changed the receiver position track settings should be changed accordingly 3 5 3 Receiver Speed Receiver speed kts lt 105 gt The objective for finding the sensitive area is to ensure acceptable signal quality for the aircraft using the ILS during approach and landing The receiver speed should therefore be set to the lowest speed used for instrument rated aircraft at the particular runway Default speed is setto 105kts knots nautical miles h Note The receiver plotter frequency response rad s can be set in the
77. 330 NANCO VRT 8 20 AUG 1994 Software Vertical Trace Mode 6 Table display If the Display toggle is selected as a TABL the computed results will be shown as a list of the parameter values This will also enable an Excel readable file to be saved on the disk if the F6 command key is pressed Before the execution of the list it is asked if the user want to take the results to the printer Hardcopy of Results y or lt SPACE gt Enter Y or another letter if the language is not English for printing out The display will stop while the screen is full and the user is asked to hit any key to continue This will be repeated as long as the all computed results are shown The list includes the following parameters x Angle from the GP zero in meters CDI DDM Course deviation in uA or DDM CSB CSB amplitude SBO SBO amplitude Phase Phase between CSB and SBO SEIS FRA IL ULIDEPATE ZIHSLSTOH CH et Cul Cn rus CEH FH Phase H ga E P 1 4 BB TA p n 1 ak p 41 2 p n TES F F aed H m sn 51 5 Sac n 7 TE BPA 77 21 Ea a7 71 mu 1AF At E F 1 15 E B7 125 279 11 1 LT LE 14 11 5 LE H B E 14 04 16 5 i e E 1 8 177 78 17 7 En PE EF 1 18 iti EF rid EH ti iDa r8 FE T i ie lo 2063185 ii 3 iz 1 98 87 42 Hm 4 72 F 1 98 BE LE 44 5 5 41 7 168 Tee 541 1 BE 5 1 78 194 72 2 4 E t hit Way Key aaa Fig VRT601 The typical screen for table display results of the vertical trace mode AXIS 330 NANCO TATE 20 A
78. 4 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 JAN 2005 20 JAN 2005 20 AUG 1994 20 JAN 2005 20 AUG 2002 20 JAN 2005 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 2002 20 AUG 2002 20 AUG 2002 20 MAR 2002 20 MAR 2002 20 AUG 2002 20 MAR 2002 20 JAN 2005 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 AX3 i AX3ii AX3 1 AX3 2 AX3 3 AX3 4 AX3 5 AX3 6 AX4 i AX4 ii AX4 2 Date 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 AUG 1999 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 JUN 2005 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 AUG 1994 20 SEP 2006 AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS 330 User s Manual GEN General Table of Content 1 Introduction 2 Usage areas 3 History S
79. 6 will be entered If smaller number than 1 zero or negative is entered the AXIS 330 will return to the Main menu 3 2 2 Distance to Bend Center Distance to Bend Center m lt 3000 gt The distance from the GP mast to the midpoint of the selected bend point on the flight inspection curve 3 2 3 Bend Wave Length Bend Wave length m lt 1302 gt The Bend wave length in meters measured from the flight measurement record Note Measure only a fraction of the bend as their bendlength will vary even over one single bend wave length Usually a quarter of a bend wave length is picked on the graph Multiply the measured value by four to convert it to a full wave length for the entry AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 3 Make Bend Option This option is for tutorial purposes and is first entered as a scattering object as in the Control Panel Then the position of the desired object is entered There are two types of scattering object available 1 F5 Top is simulating a semispheric terrain object and is used to simulate hills or any other limited size object 2 F6 Ground is simulating a discontinuity of the reflection plane Press F5 for Top and F6 for Ground By pressing Enter the AXIS 330 will exit from the Bend Analysis mode and return to the Main menu lt Bate gt AXIS 338 ILS GLIBEFRTH SIMULATOR S W BbR lt Tine gt I Enter data for objeot 34 o
80. 7 2 M Array Window Diagram On M Array systems without CLR signal the Window Diagram will change considerably even for small errors and long before detected by the monitors By using the Window Diagram Mode for entering system errors on specific Systems one can learn a lot the behaviour and responses to errors that come close to the monitor alarm limits Hinka seen Pros the Gnd 9 10008 BEg MV HI E 3 Type H ARRAY CE6S ft RATHREIN ZL CDI p t ATS 58 8 CLR OFF RTC 585 8 FHE 188 8 Elevation angles 7 CDI 4 B H 225 4 065 4 141 35 155 158 3 695 13 744 43 738 m 1 269 3 457 3 3117 8 2 859 2 995 2 952 To 2 495 2 634 2 551 15b Z 68 2 2h2 Z688 196 1 886 Z 654 1 728 225 1 n72 1 463 300 1 351 1 428 Half secta 005 8 35 Tain 8 408 20 4352 8 484 Thap 8 400 8 561 6 399 AXIS 38 44 shifted Zon fwd FLESH GFZ R Invert FAIPrint Fa eaaue Fig WND703 The Window Diagram shown when the upper antenna A3 is shifted 2cm forwards from its original position yielding a 8 phase error in the far field AXIS 330 NANCO WND 14 20 AUG 1994 Sofware AXIS 330 User s Manual APP Approach Mode Table of Content DESC MDUON tz sar re E 1 PABER PAW PARCO 2 2 1 Table of Numeric data 1 2 2 2 Toggle Panel 2 nt nds da Ans dre dns tr 3 2 9 Command ROW i9 ct ER ANR Ae ten ea aed tt te ea 3 SA BE iid N LE HN TERRAM TTTO RIS 4 3 1 Theodolite BOSTON cient to trao CAO In cr va t eset 4 3 1 1 T
81. 7408 m ANM from THR AXIS 330 ONANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 AP P 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 End Distance End Distance m 1 This is the end longitudinal distance of the approach run Default is 1m in front the GP mast 3 8 Increment Step Increment Step m lt 50 gt The distance between the computed points Default is 50 m This step should be smaller if there are bendpatterns with short bendlengths Use the I key in the toggle panel to shorten the increment 1 2 25m or even 4 12 5m are better values when reflection objects are present 3 9 Receiver Speed Receiver speed kts 105 The aircraft speed given in knots 3 10 Receiver Filter Receiver filter rad sec 2 0 The receiver plotter frequency response will influence on the smoothening of the curve See Appendix 1 for details on the low pass filtering effect 3 11 Graph Centerline Graph Scale Centerline uA 0 gt The center axis of the graph might be offset to the average deviation value at the approach azimuth angle in order to increase the resolution Note The graph full scale deflection FSD is selected by F4 key 3 12 Description text Description nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Enter new Text Type the new text max 21 characters that should go along with the graph or just press lt Enter gt to leave the present text Note Any longer text than 21 characters will be truncated AXIS 330 NANCO APP 6 2
82. 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 Table display If the Display toggle is selected as a TABL the computed results will be shown as a list of the parameter values This will also enable an Excel readable file to be saved on the disk if the F6 command key is pressed Before the execution of the list it is asked if the user want to take the results to the printer Hardcopy of Results y or SPACE Enter Y or SPACE if the results should be printed out Note Letter Y may be another letter if the language is not English The display will stop while the screen is full and the user is asked to hit any key to continue That will be repeated as long as the all computed results are shown The list includes the following parameters X Distance from the GP mast in meters CDI Course deviation in uA or DDM CSB Course CSB amplitude SBO Course SBO amplitude Phase Course Phase between CSB and SBO lt Date gt AXIS 33H ILS GLIDEPATH SIMULATOR lt 8 N AB gt lt Time gt 1258 hi cx CDI lt A C H 1iH uw Ed d E a m i 193 50 H iH 192 m m l m FE a 0 ani Li Li Li LI Li Li Li LI Li Li Li LI Li Li Li u MB et ee i SOS Li Li Li LI Li Li Li LI Li Li Li LI LI Li Li LI Li Da sJ Ba m Ha H 14 186 28 266 Aa H 15 185 28 266 t any key Fig APP601 The typical screen for table display results of the approach mode AXIS 330 APP 10 NANCO 20 OC
83. A3 to 190 and thereafter run the AXIS 330 for a Ground Current an Approach and a Window to check the result However a side effect to this dephasing will be residual SBO signal along the glide path by a corresponding lowered GP angle Also FLY UP signal will vary very much in different azimuth angles at low elevation angles ALWAYS check this clearance by running a Window Overview AXIS 330 NANCO UTL 18 20 AUG 1994 Sg Utilities Optimizing 5 5 Example In front of the GP system is a hill with a large metal shelter on top of it The distance to the shelter is 1000m in front of the GP mast 60m towards the run way and the height is 10m above the GP zero point Reflection Factor is estimat ed to 0 2 cai Approach El 3 08 fe B B 34u 122n AXIS 338 F59 6p Ctr Bp FLY BOUM f rn l f M PME 3 7 4 5 h 7 B 5 1p 11 Oa iere ja hell a PREA APEN ona ind ama Wega sens Asap lacs ann da nna sa a aa PEENE TC oR FLY UF EX S Bvad s 1B5kts fchieved GP OATUM Actual GF S TUM 2 98 15 7 w0 3 B8 14 610 CFI 0BAM F2 iewert F3 Priet F4 Saee CFBOScatter C Ualues 5 Fig UTL508 M array bends from the metal shelter located 1000m in front 60m to the side and 10m high To do the T type optimizing will improve the signal quality Beginning from the Control Panel use the following steps 1 Select Utilities by F4 2 Select from Utilities selection panel F5 Optimize feeds 3 Select T
84. AVEL 5 0cm DRY SAND 6 0cm CONCRETE 6 0cm AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 CPN 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 2 Extra signals The extra signals data group includes seven data entries and will be activated only for M ARRAY systems Fig CPN303 The M ARRAY signals 3 2 1 General ratio RT Ratio This is the general amplitude ratio between the extra signals and the NULL refer ence system in the M ARRAY Nominal value is 50 Note Both RTS and RTC will follow the RT If RTS and RTC should be set to different values the RT has no meaning and will not be displayed 3 2 2 CSB ratio RTC RTC The RTC is the percentage amplitude ratio between the CSB in A2 to CSB in A1 The nominal value is 50 See fig CPN303 3 2 3 SBO ratio RTS RTS The RTS is the percentage amplitude ratio between the SBO in A1 amp A3 with respect to SBO in A2 The nominal value is 50 See fig CPN303 Note RTS can be adjusted directly on the three SBO DATA fields under ADU at the bottom of the Control Panel Fig CPN202 and item 3 5 5 If the RTS is different from 5096 two RTS monitors will pop up above and below the SBO Amplitude fields to display the SBO ratios between antennas A3 A2 and A1 A2 AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 10 rie d Control Panel 3 2 4 Phase of extra signals PHX PHX soe The PHX is the RF phase of all extra signals relative to Null Reference system The nominal value is 180 See
85. AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 23 AXIS 330 User s Manual Fire truck is froat cal Approach El 3 88 fe B B Sdu 122n 3 5 6 7 ES ee EE ES EE EX S fead s 1B5kts fchiewed GP DATUM Actual GF S TUM 3 82 15 34 3 83 15 2 CFLIBAW CFZoIwwert F2 Priet F4 Saee FBOScatter lt Values gt Fig BND 611 Abend pattern following the ideal track along the localiser course line Fire truck is froat cel Approach El 3 88 fe B B Sdv 1B0m EXC SBrad s 1B5kts fchiceed GF BATUM Actual GP BATUR 3 81 15 334 3 83 15 B5 FI BAUM F2 lewert F3 Priet F4 Saee FB Scatter C Ualues Fig BND 612 The bend pattern when the airplane flies 22m closer to the GP mast all the way in Note that the bend pattern seems to be shifted inwards AXIS 330 NANCO BND 24 20 AUG 1994 Software AXIS 330 User s Manual SNS Sensitive Area Mode Table of Contents 1 Description 2 Data Panel 2 1 Numeric data 1 2 2 Scattering Object Data 2 sse 3 2 3 Toggles 3 reete eere o ETC RR 2 4 Commands 4 Sata Entry 25m in ans 3 1 Scattering Sheet F8 3 2 Scan Area data 1 3 2 1 Start Distance 3 2 2 Stop Distance 3 2 8 Longitudinal Step t 3 2 4 Scan Width 3 2 5 Lateral Step 3 9 Display data
86. AXIS 330 ILS Glidepath Simulator User s Manual Release 42 20 FEB 2010 NANCO Software Nordic Air Navigation Consulting AXIS 330 User s Manual Software License Notice This manual and software are copyrighted by Nanco Software with all rights reserved This manual or software may not be copied in whole or part without written consent of Nanco Software except in the normal use of the software or to make a backup copy of the software Warranty Nanco Software warrants the physical diskette and documentation to be free of defects in workmanship for a period of 60 days from the date of purchase In the event of a defect in material or workmanship during the warranty period Nanco Software will replace the defective diskette or documentation when defective product is returned to Nanco Software by the owner The remedy for this breach of warranty is limited to replacement only and shall not cover any other damages Liability Nanco software can take NO responsibility for any damage or losses that can be traced back to the use of AXIS ILS SIMULATOR SOFTWARE In order to get the optimum result from this software the user should have a good knowl edge of ILS theory and have proper experience in practical work with ILS equipment to use the computed results with caution In some cases where the simulated results from predicting signal quality due to scattering objects are in the same magnitude as the allowed tolerances addi
87. AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Panel The data screen shows the values to be used in the sensitive area computation The screen consists of four main parts 1 Numeric data 2 Scattering Object data 3 Toggles and 4 Commands AAIE J316 ILE Gel DAH EIMUEHTIUS Fig SNS201 The data panel of the Sensitive Area mode 2 1 Numeric data 1 Numeric data shows the values to be used in the computation The numeric data are divided into five group and can be changed by lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt F2 gt and F4 keys Scan Scan area is the area where the sheet is moved around Begin the longitudinal start from the GP mast End the longitudinal stop from the GP mast X inc the longitudinal step increment Width the maximum lateral distance of the scan area Y inc the lateral step increment AXIS 330 NANCO SNS 2 20 JAN 2005 Software Sensitive Area Mode Display Display data determines the scale and background figure of the display including the graph x scale and the position of the Runway and Taxiway X scale the maximum longitudinal distance RWY dist the runway lateral distance from the GP mast This can be set only in the Control Panel TaxiWay the lateral distance between the runway and taxiway centres RX position track The data of the RX receiver position is depending on the T rack toggle In the Point C option the RX position is fixed whereas in the Track A X option the end point X can be selece
88. Az Sdw Theo FSH Twds RWY To 5 d B or C at Limit D isplay E rase G raph dir I ncr x X Scale P arameter S ense T racking N ormalized Mo 6 Fixed Position Mode Height Above GP Zero F2 Angl Vertical Angle F2 Hgt Point No Far Field Near Field Item No to be changed Antenna Number Parameter No MIN MAX Incr Step Forwards Sideways Height x Error Wet snow layer Monitor Fwd Sdw Hgt Twds RWY To 6 d B or D isplay E rase I ncr x N Points P arameter S ense Mo 7 Ground Current Mode Grid spacing Start Distance Stop Distance Step Distance Sideways Track To 7 D isplay P arameter Mo 8 Bend Analysis Mode Approach Elevation Angle Track Azimuth Angle 20 UN 2005 AX2 13 AXIS 330 User s Manual F2 Make Bends CR Analyze Bends Number of Bend Points 6 max Point No Distance to Bend Center Bend Wavelength Distance Bend Length Threshold distance Spare Projection Level Max distance on X Scale Min distance on X Scale Sideways offset Samples Proj level Y shift Begin End Position adjusted Press CR to Re Draw gt Enter the position of the object relative to GlidePath Forward Dist Sideways Dist Height iol Enter distance where Bends shall be computed div Track AZ To 8 N one Mo 9 Sensitive Area Mode Scan area Scan begin dist
89. CR to exit Fb Top Fh Geound Freoo lt CR gt to EXIT Fig UTL501 Screen for optimizing type selection 5 2 T errain illumination cancellation lt F5 gt Certain objects in the area in front of the GP system might have surfaces sizes and locations causing SBO and CSB signals to be reflected into the GP ap proach sector These reflections will cause bends and scalloping on the glide path structure making automatic landings difficult or disturbing for the pilots The M array T optimizing process will set up the feeds in the antenna system so the SBO and CSB radiation towards a given coordinate is close to Zero If more than one object is present the selected coordinate might be on the most significant reflection object or simply somewhere between them The signal illumination will be low in a large volume around the optimizing point AXIS 330 NANCO 20 AUG 1994 UTL 15 AXIS 330 User s Manual A null illumination line will be stretch sideways in both direction from the optimiz ing point 4 go 77 JET Fig UTL502 Null illumination line for optimized M ARRAY The exact position of this line is depending on the lateral offset of the GP anten nas 5 2 1 Data Entry Forward Distance The forward distance is the longitudinal distance between the GP mast and the midpoint of the object measured along the centerline Note If the entered distance is zero the entry is can
90. D is selected by lt F4 gt command 3 7 Description text Description nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Enter new Text _ Type the new text max 21 characters that should go along with the graph or just press Enter to leave the present text Note Any longer text than 21 characters will be truncated AXIS 330 NANCO e 20 AUG 1994 VRT 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 Toggles The toggles allow quick changes to some of the often used settings Press the key shown between the brackets to execute the function If the language is not English the text and the letter within brackets should be different and the com mand will respond to the new letter 4 1 d B or Toggles the amplitude scale between and dB linear scale dB logarithmic scale 10 dB div Note The effect of this toggle is only seen in the amplitude parameters such as CSB SBO etc 4 2 D isplay Selection for the display mode of the computed results GRAPH graphical output 3D three dimensional graphical output TABL table output 4 3 E rase Selection for erasing the earlier computed data OK the data in the memory has been erased and a new curve may now be computed DATA the memory still contains the latest result and the curve may be displayed again with altered toggle settings 4 4 I ncr x Reduce the increment to 1 2 or 1 4 of the current one in order to increase the reso lution in case there are short bends on the curve 1 Increment is same a
91. Distance from GP Fig 5CA233 Display for entering the forward distance of the ground edge 2 6 2 Angle of edge front Rot The rotation angle of the ground edge is the horizontal angle between the edge line and the line which is perpendicular to GP centerline The clockwise rotation is entered as a positive value and the negative value represents the counter clockwise rotation Angle of edge front to RU lt 90 _ 18989 example 1289 FC 1 1 1 1 i 1 Li 1 1 Fig 5CA234 Display for entering the rotation angle of the ground edge AXIS 330 NANCO S CA 1 6 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 2 6 3 Height above second plane Hgt Il The height above a secondary reflection plane beyond the object The default value is zero which means a very rough surface unable to reflect signals Height above second reflection p Height If no secondary plane exists press CR Fig SCA235 Display for entering the height of the second plane Note If there are no secondary plane beyond the object enter zero or just press Enter AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 SCA 17 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 Editing Objects If there are object s in the system a list of the present objects will be dis played At the bottom are shown the editor commands Date gt AXIS 338 ILS GLIDEPRTH SIMULATOR lt S N 668 lt Time Offset all
92. E rase I ncr x P arameter S ense M ultiple MO 3 Vertical Trace FWD Distance SDW Distance MIN Angle MAX Angle Increment F2 Multiple runs F3 NF mon GP angle Monitor Fwd Sdw Hgt SBO amp CSB Ampl Twds RWY AXIS330 ONANCO Software 20 UN 2005 AX2 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual Number of runs 1 6 FWD Dist of run No CDI SBO CSB CLR OFF Ampl Phase To 3 d B or D isplay E rase I ncr x P arameter S ense M ultiple H gt scale W nd 3D MO 4 Window Mode FWD Distance SDW offset LLZ Course Sector LOW MED HIGH V HI Air Gnd dn up CDI SBO CSB CLR OFF Ampl Phase Type Ant RTC RTS PHX CLRA CLRC Elevation angles 2 Half sectors Nom SBO CSB Phase 2 Clearance ampl Window seen from the To 4 A mpl range R esolution E rase P arameter S een from W nd 3D Mo 5 Approach Mode Elevation angle Level feet SDW offset Start Distance End Distance Increment Step Start Angle Low End Angle High Track azimuth Receiver speed Receiver filter Hyper Theo Level Theodolite FWD position m Theodolite SDW position m Theodolite HGT above GP zero m Hyperbolic Ideal Spare Theodolite Located Theo Fwd Sdw Hgt Theo upwards tilt Achieved GP DATUM Actual GP DATUM Level Run at Approach El AXIS330 ONANCO AX2 12 20J UN 2005 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software Appendix 2 Files inthe AXIS 330
93. F2 Change The Change command is used to modify the values of the numeric data used in the computation See chapter 3 Numeric Data Entry of this section 5 2 F3 Text Quick command to enter text description into the graph See 3 11 of this sec tion 5 3 F4 FSD Graph Full Scale Deflection FSD x 800 400 200 100 50 25 12 6 uA Default value is 50uA 400UA in Level Run on the full vertical scale but can be changed to any of the indicated values Move the cursor with the Left Right arrow keys and press Enter 5 4 F6 Excel Note This command is only shown and enabled when the Display toggle is selected as a TABL With this command you can generate an Excel readable file When the F6 is pressed the AXIS 330 ask the name of the file as follows Current file name DATA XL CR or enter new The default name is DATA XL Type a new name or just press Enter to keep the default name The name must be according to the DOS specification other wise it will be truncated name 8 letters and extension 3 letters After the file name is entered this command will be shown as a filename between angle brackets To disable this function press F6 again and the original com mand text F6 Excel is displayed 5 5 F10 Menu Function key lt F10 gt returns the program execution into the main menu 5 6 Continue CR Starts the approach mode run AXIS 330 ONANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 APP
94. Faw Layerto PS Lest deFsalt Sete Pia Stap Regreet EspapeQeit T Hee Ep a DATA Field WVCTRLIP4ND bPaerresee Falat dE 4 Hawk Deum a DATE Pield Fa lactat Ba let Mews te Heat DATA Fear ies las lecrense Valme X Hawk bark eee DATA frotita Del DebpBRAT Falat wiz Sans First DATA Sept is Pao Derpespe ales Em Lest DATA Rect im ECTRLIFS Ds Decrease Valar dx Eater Tratisme TO HEHE Here help ru a Tisu Bet keus ia Haie Ropees H Messe Destrertiees Fig CPN401 Help Screen of the Control Panel More help screens are displayed when pressing lt H gt or M keys H key will display the hotkeys and M key will display the mouse instruction 4 2 F2 DOS Temporary access to DOS The AXIS 330 occupies about 350kB of RAM leav ing the remaining memory available for any other use Type EXIT to return to AXIS 4 3 F3 SetUp The F3 opens the setup screen for configuring and saving the setup as a de fault You can set the system data site data language and the printer control as well as the screen type and the default colours Detailed description is given in section SET 20 OCT 1995 CPN 21 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 4 F4 Util The F4 opens the utility selection menu There are three utilities available in this module 1 MCU settings 1 ADU adjustments 3 Reflection Plane RPL Slope computation 4 Optimizing the M ARRAY to the terrain A complete description about the utilities are given in s
95. G 1994 LAT 8 20 AUG 1994 CPN 6 20 AUG 1999 UTL 12 20 AUG 1994 LAT 9 20 AUG 1994 CPN 7 20 AUG 1994 UTL 13 20 AUG 1994 LAT 10 20 OCT 1995 CPN 8 20 AUG 1994 UTL 14 20 AUG 1994 LAT 11 20 AUG 1994 CPN 9 20 AUG 1999 UTL 15 20 AUG 1994 LAT 12 20 AUG 1994 CPN 10 20 OCT 1997 UTL 16 20 AUG 1994 CPN 11 20 AUG 1999 UTL 17 20 AUG 1994 VRT i 20 OCT 1997 CPN 12 20 AUG 1994 UTL 18 20 AUG 1994 VRT ii 20 OCT 1997 CPN 13 20 AUG 1994 UTL 19 20 AUG 1994 VRT 1 20 AUG 1994 CPN 14 20 AUG 1994 UTL 20 20 AUG 1994 VRT 2 20 OCT 1997 CPN 15 20 AUG 1994 UTL 21 20 AUG 1994 VRT 3 20 AUG 1994 CPN 16 20 AUG 2002 UTL 22 20 AUG 1994 VRT 4 20 OCT 1995 CPN 17 20 AUG 2002 VRT 5 20 AUG 1994 CPN 18 20 AUG 2002 SCA 20 JAN 2005 VRT 6 20 OCT 1997 CPN 19 20 AUG 2002 SCA ii 20 JAN 2005 VRT 7 20 AUG 1994 CPN 20 20 AUG 2002 SCA 1 20 JAN 2005 VRT 8 20 AUG 1994 CPN 21 20 OCT 1995 SCA 2 20 JAN 2005 VRT 9 20 AUG 1994 CPN 22 20 AUG 2003 SCA 3 20 JAN 2005 VRT 10 20 AUG 1994 CPN 23 20 AUG 1994 SCA 4 20 JAN 2005 VRT 11 20 AUG 1994 CPN 24 20 AUG 1994 SCA 5 20 JAN 2005 VRT 12 20 AUG 1994 CPN 25 20 AUG 1994 SCA 6 20 JAN 2005 VRT 13 20 AUG 1994 CPN 26 20 AUG 1994 SCA 7 20 JAN 2005 VRT 14 20 AUG 1994 CPN 27 20 OCT 1995 SCA 8 20 JAN 2005 CPN 28 20 OCT 1995 SCA 9 20 JAN 2005 WND i 20 JAN 2005 CPN 29 20 AUG 1999 SCA 10 20 JAN 2005 WND ii 20 JAN 2005 CPN 30 20 AUG 1999 SCA 11 20 JAN 2005 WND 1 20 AUG 1994 CPN 31 20 AUG 1994 SCA 12 20 JAN 2005 WND 2 20 OCT 1997 CPN 32 20 AUG 1994 SCA 13 20 JAN 2005 WND 3 20 JAN 20
96. GB CDI Meters WORK SHOW Release number Textfor display Antenna system NR 21 SBR 22 M23 Colour codes forthe panels Screen Type 2 CGA 3 Herc 9 EGA 12 VGA Antenna ElementType GP Site on FLY Right O Left 1 side of RWY Printand stop 0 with form feed 1 20 0 or40 1 Frequency Channels Frequency Glide path angle Forward slope Sideways slope Runway distance Reflection plane type Receiverresponse in rad s Roman 8 character set English language files in use CDI is used DDM can be selected Meters are used feetcan be selected Name of the Work Files directory family Name ofthe Graphic Screen Files directory family M ARRAY DATA Only if M ARRAY GP 50 0 50 0 50 0 180 0 0 0 343 0 End of GP INI Ratio common forRTS and RTC RTS 96 RTC 96 PHX CLR amplitude in of CSB in A1 CLR deviation in uA Reflection plane code 1 PERFECT 2 SALT WATER 3 FRESH WATER 4 SOAKED SOIL 5 MOIST EARTH 6 WET SAND 7 DRY EARTH 8 DRY SAND 9 CONCRETE AXIS330 NANCO Software 20 UN 2005 AX2 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 The file GP RUN The file GP RUN is a file containing the latestused System S etU p and all data entered from the Control P anel The structure ofthe file consistof parts and every partbegins with the headline in square brackets Comments are written italics and do not appear in the file AXIS 330 R40 Work file text 3 3 0 0 333 800 3 000
97. IS 330 Can not be run alone NORM DUMMYADU MCU SBO CSB RTC RTS PHX CLR Att Phase Balance NULL REFERENCE SIDEBAND REFERENCE M ARRAY Type Fl Help CTRL PgUp Incr CTRL PgDn Decr Enter RETURN F10 Quit Monitor Combining Unit Select simulation angle Output REFLECTION PLANE SUB MODULE TO AXIS 330 Can not be run alone Weighted Reflection Plane FSL Computation F2 Load file F3 Compute New F4 Continue lt CR gt Quit Start Stop Step Sdw SideWays Forward Distance Multiple SideWays Lines Y N Entering from Press CR to accept value Point No Press CR to skip input Enter height 20 UN 2005 AX2 15 AXIS 330 User s Manual Weight distance m Dist Height Base Line F2 Graph F3 Save results F4 FSL F5 List data CR to Quit Hit any key to continue Dist Height ExtBase Weight W Height Null REF Sideband REF M ARRAY Enter Filename without Extension Reflection plane profile Weight dist GP zero height F2 Invert F3 Printout End of file AXIS330 ONANCO AX2 16 20 UN 2005 Software Appendix 3 AX3 Appendix 3 Definitions and Abbreviations AXIS 330 O NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 AX3 i AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS330 NANCO AX3 ii 20 AUG 1994 Software Appendix 3 0 9 2D 3D A1 A2 A3 AAD ADU AF Ampl ASY APP Ant Antenna Antenna Array Antenna Element Two dimensional Thre
98. If the reflection plane slopes this height will be given above the GP mast zero height for reference purposes 3 2 The Error Data Entry The error data are entered by the F5 allowing you modify the error parameter to be examined The Error Data is entered in two steps firstly is selected the error source and type and secondly is entered the error range 3 2 1 Error Source and Type The first step of the data entry includes the error source and type selection First is selected the error source and then the error type The error source can be the SBO signal feed from transmitter press lt 0 gt one antenna press lt 1 gt lt 2 gt or lt 3 gt or a layer of wet snow press lt 4 gt Bate ARTS 23B ILE GLIBEFRTH SIMULATOR 2 82 BRR Tire tem Ho to be changed SE Error cmo Antenna Hupher 1 3 F Met anow laser 42 Item Ho to be changed B d of 4 45 Fig FIX302 Data screen for the error source selection AXIS 330 NANCO PA 20 OCT 1997 FIX 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual SBO signal Error 1 SBO Ampl 2 SBO Phase Parameter No 1 2 1 The error parameters in case of SBO signal error are amplitude and phase Enter 1 one for the amplitude and 2 two for the phase Antenna Error 1 SBO Ampl SBO Phase CSB Ampl CSB Phase Ampl 6 Phase UT amp WN 1 Parameter No 1 6 lt 1 gt In case of Antenna Error there are six possible error parameter
99. Miles NM AXIS 330 ONANCO EE 20 SEP 2006 APP 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 8 O rigin Xsc Toggle start point of the X scale between the Threshold and the Antenna system 4 9 P arameter Selection which parameter to be displayed CDI Graphics will display the DDM deviation in uA MOD Graphics will display the BBP modulus 4 10 S ense Selection for the sense direction 9010 Fly Down will be in the upper part of the graph 900 Fly Down will be in the lower part of the graph 4 11 T racking Selection for tracking mode Hyper Hyperbolic path follows the glide path angle from the base of the GP mast at any point along the approach It also corrects for changes in the GP angle along the track due to FSL and SSL This gives a straight line of zero DDM if the glide path system is normal Theo Tracked by a theodolite adjusted to the Elevation angle located at a user specified position This will yield a curve different from zero DDM along the approach which should be identical to Flight Inspection measurements Level A horizontal run at a user specified level above the GP base 4 12 N ormalized Nomalize the amplitude along the approach in order to cancel the effect of signal loss depending on the distance The reason is to check for effects in lobing and reflections Normalized NO is the real case while YES is analytical case AXIS 330 NANCO APP 8 20 SEP 2006 Sottware Approach Mode 5 Commands 5 1
100. N ICAICME 4 iP rpose and Scope 2 os nex eR TORRENS 4 2 Organization essen 4 3 How to use this manual s 4 4 Language sssssneeeeeneeenenns 4 5 Typefaces roue Rer RES 5 Getting Started 5 1 System Requirements 5 2 User Code 5 3 Program CD 5 4 Installing the AXIS 330 5 4 1 Making Backup sse 5 4 2 Installation eie recette tt entrer Re lies 5 5 Starting the AXIS 330 first time sss 5 6 Running the AXIS 330 5 8 Structure of the AXIS 330 esses 5 9 Main SIGDS is cece ier ED nte 6 Updates 5 04 en OLEO ODER 6 1 Earlier releases sssssssssssseseeeeeeneeeneen nennen 6 2 Access COM eee pret ione erret inten 7 System Configuration 7 1 Display Screen 7 2 Printer Drivers 7 3 The Default Setup esseeeeeneeneneneenne 7 4 Startup Arguments esee 7 5 Pasting GRAPF into windows applications 20 JUN 2005 GEN i AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO GEN ii 20 JUN 2005 POMA General 1 Introduction The AXIS 330 is an efficient tool for a practical ILS Glide Path simulation The software can simulate three basic image glide path types 1 Null Reference 2 Sideband Reference and 3 M ARRAY also named Capt
101. Panel contains two types of fields 1 Info Fields and 2 Data Fields The info fields can not be changed on the screen as they are result of computed values and are just for information purposes The data fields can be activated highlighted by the arrow keys and their con tents can be changed by the value stepping keys 2 1 Info Fields There are five info fields in the Control Panel 1 Heading 2 Name of the system 3 Miscellaneous information 4 MCU and ADU info 5 Registration info and Function keys utput diff 3 ppgp pidge B 3hari NU 752m HE from TH tp 11 57 8 8 Angel B BEdE AZ prukut 4d h Hd 168 8 Fhari Bat hi peoke A7 iph Fig CPN201 Info Fields of the Control Panel Heading 1 The Heading are comprised of the Date the Time and the Software Identification with the serial number The lt I gt key will show the release number and date in the heading field Name of the system 2 The name of system is an 21 characters long text field describing the setup The default name of the system is Default setup It will be shown when starting up the software or pressing the F5 The F6 will retrieve the system used the last time the software was run AXIS 330 NANCO E Software Site 20 AUG 2002 Control Panel Miscellaneous information 3 Scatters No Snow No Pln Dpth 2cm Opt 300 60 2 CDI DDM The number of entered scattering objects If no scattering
102. Scan stop dist X increment Scan width Y increment Graph distances Display X range spare Taxi way dist Receiver location Receiver Fwd dist Receiver Sdw dist Height Receiver height Receiver track Receiver start Receiver stop Elevation angle Threshold distance Receiver speed Static bends Limit of bend F8 Length Hgt Btm Hgt Rot Tilt Refl 1 Scan Begin End X inc Width Y inc 2 Display X scale RWY dist TaxiWay 3 RX position Fwd Sdw Hgt 3 RX track Start Stop FREE FULL FAST GP div pos track Full sidescan AXIS330 ONANCO AX2 14 20 UN 2005 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software Appendix 2 Files inthe AXIS 330 Fast sidescan not completed F2 Fast Full F9 CDI tone To 9 A dd T rack RX E rase O rientation S catter W orst Case Y axis scan AMUnits Antenna Distribution Unit or Monitor Combining Unit Adjustments spare Thomson New ADU Normarc M array ADU Standard Type Normarc M array ADU Type B ADUMCU Move slider to the LEFT Connector ON OFF Move slider to the RIGHT Connector ON OFF Move to a higher Control or Connector Move to a lower Control or Connector PgUp Move slider to the LEFT Connector ON OFF PgDn Move slider to the RIGHT Connector ON OFF CTRL PgUp Move slider FAST to the LEFT CTRL PgDn Move slider FAST to the RIGHT D ni hit ANY Key DEMO VERSION ADJUSTMENTS NOT ENABLED SUB MODULE TO AX
103. T 1997 SINE Approach Mode 7 Graphic Display When the Display toggle is selected as a GRAF the computed results will be shown as a graphic diagram 7 1 Graphic Diagram The graphic diagram includes all information that is set in data panel Below the centerline is shown the letters A B C T presenting the ILS points specified in ICAO Annex 10 Additionally on the bottom row there are six functions available enabling the handle or examine the graph result Fire truck in front CDI Approach El 3 88 Az 6 8 Sdu 122m FSD 25pA Ctr GpA FLY DOUN 5 6 km Paar aS a ina A E A FLY UP RX 5 rad s 185kts Achieved GP DATUM Actual GP DATUM 3 82 15 26m 3 83 14 88m F10B amp U FZ Invert F3 Print F4 Save F8 Scatter Ualues Fig APP701 The typical graphic diagram of the approach mode for the CDI parameter with one scattering object AXIS 330 ONANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 APP 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 2 Functions The functions of the graph display are F1 B amp W Black amp White to Colour Selector F2 Invert Display invert the colours for cut amp paste purposes F3 Print Print the curve to a printer F4 Save Save a B amp W graph for later play back F8 Scatter Scattering Object Editor Alt F8 Offset Offset of all scattering sheets together lt Values gt Curve Tracer 7 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector F1 B amp W This
104. The SDW Offset represents the lateral distance between the GP zero and the Window center Negative values are towards the runway The default distance is the distance to the runway centerline 3 3 Localiser Course Sector Localiser Course Sector lt 4 00 gt Yellow vertical lines show the localiser course sector These can be adjusted on the gaph by this setting 3 4 AZ angle in Table AZ angle in Table lt 8 00 gt The table shows tha elevation angle for different given CDI values shown as lines on the graph The Table can show these values at three different symmetrical azimuth angles This setting will select the az angle between 2 and 12 degrees in 1 or 2 degrees step depending on the resolution See para 4 2 20 JAN 2005 WND 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 Toggles The toggles are used to change the settings of graphic Press the key shown between the brackets to execute the function If the language is not English the text and the letter within brackets should be different and the toggle will respond to that letter 4 1 A mplitude range The Amplitude range toggle is effecting to the CSB and SBO curves The range defines the density of the ISO curves the higher range the bigger step between ISO curves LOW low range MED medium range HIGH high range Note Only eight ISO curves are displayed beginning from the lowest value so LOW and MED ranges may only show areas with low field strength 4 2
105. The values of SBO A1 and SBO A3 are RTS of SBO in A2 3 5 6 SBO phases Antenna Phas These are the absolute SBO phases relative to the CSB nominal Phase in A1 3 6 The Near Field monitor reading NF mon pA or D The NF monitor is located on the reflection plane in front of the glide path antenna mast according to the coordinates Dist Height and Sdw below This NF mon field will display the CDI or DDM in the monitored point point which should correspond to the nominal Glide Path angle 3 6 1 Forward distance Dist m The Dist is the theoretical distance from the GP mast GP ZERO to the monitor antenna The default distance is computed from the information in field 1 but can be changed by the user 3 6 2 Height Hgt m The Hgtis the theoretical height of the monitor antenna above the effective ground plane The default distance is computed from the information in field 1 but can be changed by the user AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 16 20 AUG 2002 Software Control Panel 3 6 3 Sideways Distance Sdw m The monitor can be moved sideways along the ISO Dephase line where a posi tive value brings the monitor further away from the RWY and hence to a greater distance from the GP mast and therefore higher up In practise the maximum horizontal angle AZ angle is about 20 due to the radiation diagram first null at 30 in some of the antenna types The purpose is to get monitor at a higher position to re
106. ToDOS Go to DOS 6 lt F7 Description Write your own directory label 7 lt F8 gt Make directory Make a new directory 8 lt CR gt Return Exit CDaz BRIE FPA ILE GLIDEPSIS IMSLATOH ona Playback crees files Shew directerdest Select hy Py p Pyle Piles directery gt LEA CPS Descriptiss Dzefamlt directery CPE heu P4 tDzrlete all CPS eu directery Pitie Dit CCH BHeture Fig PLY201 Playback Screen files command screen AXIS 330 NANCO Software PLY 2 20 AUG 1994 Playback Screen files 2 1 Show directory quick selection Show directories PgUp PgDn Using the keys lt PgUp gt and lt PgDn gt can scroll directories from SHOW and SHOWhH through SHOW5 0 If the selected directory does not exist a warning will ask you to create it by pressing the F8 key ARIE 338 ILE GLIBEFHTH EIMULHTOR EI BR Fla rk rruun filaz Show dirgrcturinz Gelect by Fols Fobn Files directory BHO F Burzcriptinn Lr ALUDENBECTAE ES F3 LPH to mal AF256Bou Fdibulnte all iFholkw divectory File BE ZCESBE amp urn Fig PLY202 The selected directory does not exist 2 2 Starting show F2 Show When a directory is selected the show can be started by the lt F2 gt key If the first screen file AXGO BAS does not exist in the selected directory the user is warned of No Files and the AXIS 330 will return to the Main menu Bate ARTS 338 ILE GLIBREFRTH ZIBMULATOR 57WB BBEO lt T ins File
107. UG 1994 VRT 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 Graphic Display When the Display toggle is selected as a GRAF the computed results will be shown as a graphic diagram 7 1 Graphic Diagram There are 2D and 3D graphic diagrams depending on the selection of the D isplay toggle 7 1 1 Two dimensional graphic diagram Two dimensional 2D graphic diagram includes all information that is set in data panel The CDI diagram shows additionally the calculated angles in the points of 150 75 0 75 150uA as well as the upper and lower half sec tors 75uA up dn On the bottom row there are six functions available enabling to handle or examine the graph result Step for docurest Vertical Trace Fed 10000m Sd 122m Chl iph CTI ICS LITIA Tue PRI Pe Jen aug 2 200 2 3 0007 3 351 3 735 Tet 351 CPOE F2 leert FE Frist Filiae g ia lueg Fig VRT701 The typical 2D graphic diagram of the vertical trace mode for the CDI parameter AXIS 330 NANCO VRT 10 20 AUG 1994 LE Vertical Trace Mode 7 1 2 Three dimensional graphic diagram Three dimensional 3D graphic diagram shows 13 curves side by side in different azimuth angles from 12 to 12 as a curtain like grid diagram On the bottom row there are five functions available enabling to handle the graph result Syetes fur docesent Cnr pa ARTS 330 pn FLY IMH frm pn FLY UP CPI CPS 0 Invert F3MPPint Fi k5ay
108. X On Off Hot key lt Alt C gt toggles clearance transmitter ON OFF It sets the value 20 amplitude in antenna 1 and 3 relative to the CSB in A1 lt Alt D gt Deflections in uA or 96 Hot key D toggles deflection between CDI uA and DDM in ADU lt Alt E gt Extended Freq 20 40 Ch Hot key E toggles frequency steps between 20 channels 100kHz and 40 channels 50kHz AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 28 Software 20 OCT 1995 Control Panel Alt F Freq input on GP or LLZ Hot key lt Alt F gt swaps the GP LLZ frequency as input field on the screen Alt L Lock lower screen Hot key lt Alt L gt locks the lower screen if site data FSL SSL etc should be adjusted without automatic update of antenna location and feeds lt Alt M gt Measures in meters or feet Hot key lt Alt M gt toggles all measures between meters and feet lt Alt S gt Slopes in degrees or percentage 96 Hot key Alt S toggles ground slopes FSL and SSL between and Alt X Set the Integral Monitor Alarm Limits This will open the DATA for the alarm limits for GP DS and the Clearance signals The values are preset to 35pA 15uA and 50pA respectively When changing a feed parameter on the Control Panel the Monitor output indicates alarm when the value field turns red Alt Z Set the nominal monitor values for the alarm circuit After setting up the system to new values or changing one or more of the monitor angle
109. XIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 UTL 17 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 3 1 Data Entry Forward Distance from GP The forward distance is the longitudinal distance between the midpoint of the ground edge and the GP mast measured along the GP centerline Note Ifthe entered distance is zero the entry is cancelled Pervard Distance fron GP Fig UTL506 Display for entering the forward distance of the ground edge Sideways Distance The sideways distance is the lateral distance between the GP centerline and the reference point on the edge normally zero Use negative values towards runway regardless if it is to the right hand or left hand side of the GP antenna Sideways Distance Free GP CL n 9 m a t 4 ur ct lt SN 504 gt Fig UTL507 Display for entering the sideways distance of the object 5 4 Another method to reduce SBO ground current Another method of reducing the SBO ground current on the reflection plane is simply to dephase the SBO signal in the upper antenna A3 in positive direction The impact of advancing the phase of A3 by 10 to 20 will be a significant reduc tion in the ground current and hence less diffracted signals from edges in the terrain There are no automatic routines for this method in the AXIS 330 so the user must follow good old cut and tries to find a good setting The first step will usually be to set SBO
110. able modules are depending on your access level coded into the user number When the software is started it begins with the control panel CPN showing the default settings The control panel is used for setting all system and site data When this is done you can proceed to the Main Menu where you can start de sired module by activating highlighting the item and pressing Enter Another way to start the module is pressing the item number Control Panel CPN SetUp Utilities Scatt Obj SET UTL SCA Main Menu Playback PLY Lateral Trace LAT Vertical Trace VRT WND Approach APP Fixed Position FIX Ground Current GND Bend Analysis BND 3 a o z o lt lt o z Sensitive Area SNS Fig GEN501 The Main Modules of the AXIS 330 AXIS 330 NANCO GEN 10 20 JUN 2005 Software General 5 9 Main steps The usage should follow these main steps 1 Setallthe DATA on the upper part of the Control Panel by using the arrow keys and value stepping keys Enter scattering objects if desired using the F8 Enter errors if desired on the lower part of the Control Panel Note Any subsequent changes in the upper part of the screen will cancel these changes The Alt L key will LOCK the lower panel in case the upper part needs to be changed later on Press enter to proceed to the Main Menu 5 Select one of the Menu Items by the lt Up Dn gt arrow keys and lt e
111. ake place For the trace inputs it needs the minimum and maximum angles as well as the increment angle to step These angles are measured from the foot of the GP mast so called GP zero point This simulation is useful for checking angle and sectors as well as clearance below and above the full sectors The display can be a table 2 Dimensional or 3 Dimensional graphic diagram The graphics shows the Deviation SBO CSB amplitudes and SBO CSB phase After a 2D vertical trace the theoretical Glide path angle and sectors are computed The 3D graphs are identical to the 2D graph while showing 13 curves side by side in different azimuth angles from 12 to 12 making a curtain like grid diagram This will give an instant view of the sideways coverage of CDI and carrier field strength in required 8 azimuth coverage sector AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 VRT 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Panel The data panel shows the values to be used in the vertical trace mode computa tion The data panel is divided into three main parts 1 the table of numeric data 2 the toggle panel 3 the command row PY nistsene LEE SIM Distant m HIH Baule 8 087 HET Eagle E Vas rest 6 857 Ale pRACEE Han 11 scale zz 4 080 Res i pt ia Fig VRT201 The data panel of the vertical trace mode 2 1 Table of Numeric data 1 The numeric data shows the values to be used in the computation The numeric data can be cha
112. ance the background colour should not ever be chosen differently from black or white See details in appendix AX2 4 1 Change Colours AXIS 330 is using four different colourpairs fore background for heading cursor text and data value Colours are changed by stepping the number keys and you will see the effect immediately on the screen Colour changing number keys are as follows Foreground colour of the heading Background colour of the heading Foreground colour of the cursor Background colour of the cursor Foreground colour of the text Background colour of the text Foreground colour of the data values RESTORE all colours to the standard settings Text 5 and Data 7 values have the same background colour 4 2 Colours Codes Colour selection depends on the video adapter of your computer 1 key 2 key 3 key 4 key 5 key 6 key 7 key 8 key Note For standard colour graphic adapters include the following colour choices Fore and BackGround code 0 NOOR WD AXIS 330 ForeGround only colour code colour Black 8 Gray Blue 9 Lightblue Green 10 Light green Cyan 11 Light cyan Red 12 Light red Magenta 13 Light magenta Brown 14 Yellow White 15 High intensity white NANCO Software 20 NOV 1994 SET 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 Command Panel When the settings are completed in Data Panel or you like to only delete the User s Code you will proceed by enter key to this screen inclu
113. ange from 1 through 50 3 homedinAXIS SHOW The default directory for saved graphic screens In addition there are optional SHOWnn directories for separate screen files that can be selected with the P gUp P gDn keys The number nn will range from 1 through 50 Note homedir is the path where the AXIS 330 has been installed AXIS330 ONANCO Software 20 UN 2005 AX2 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Description of Files After installation the AXIS directory contains the following files GP BAT GP 001 GP INI GP RUN GP 004 GP 009 GP10 UK GP11 UK GP12 UK 1A330 NEW IA330LNG NEW A330 EXE A330RPX EXE A330ADU EXE The batch file that starts the software by firstloading the GRAPHICS printer driver into the memory before loading the A330 EXE file The Access file that contains the registration code and enables running the software This file willbe changed the firsttime you run the software and entering the user code To disable this file run the F3 key Setup and DELETE YOUR ACCESS CODE from the MENU This will prevent others from using the software as well as enabling you to enter a new USER CODE if you are given a new access level Contains the standard glide path setup on the Control Panel when starting the software Each ofthe networkusers have their own file in their user area for separate setups The F5 key will fetch this setup atthe Control Panel To change the contentofthis file permanently ru
114. ange the Y scale Full Scale Deflection F6 Excel Enable an Excel readable file Note this command is shown only when the Display tog gle is selected for Table F10 Menu Return to menu CR Continue Starts the computation AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 VRT 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 Data Entry The numeric data are entered by the F2 command allowing to change one or more items The present value is always shown between angle brackets Enter new value from the keyboard or press Enter to keep the present value In the title row is shown a calculated position of the course line monitor LIDEPSTS IHELETOR PHD Distasepe Car igna CPIMMaltiple aes FM Distance Cay E EE X 5 Juis HWT HIH Gay le cor Ba HET deg le coy E SAMU lat rest co MM Graph Scale Ceaterlige Co B gt Desc it in Bater acu Text Text te Pelle model Fig VRT301 Numeric data entries 3 1 Forward Distance FWD Distance lt 10000 gt F2 Multiple Forward distance represents the longitudinal distance from the GP zero to the trace measured along a GP centerline Pressing F2 enables running upto 6 runs at user specified distances First enter the number of traces and then the longitudinal and lateral distances for each run As seen below previous values are default in brackets for sub sequent runs ILE OLIDEFSTE SIHNLATOR MEE ET n PHD Distaepe Cae s lianan VPEIHealtip
115. antenna phase error settings clearance transmitter power deviation etc 2 1 MCU Panel The MCU Panel layout depends on the selected antenna system M ARRAY Null Ref and SideBand Ref in the Control Panel Here will only the MCU for M ARRAY be described The MCU Panel can be divided into two main parts 1 Adjustable parameters 2 Command set Dai que 1996 ANTS 338 ES ACU SIHULATIOR UNIT TELLE R AEEAY HO Seleot olmulation angie a 8 266 i Bo 3 88 Fel E pgg AE FT Side LAB 8 Foes 2 648 35 16Bp 2 265 ntt 2 494E 45 fld o 2 888 EJ Abio 1 368 fee 65 sd Bo HB TBET Fase Aa c Fhaso fig EN fa Az sl ut put i CTRL Foalle Toor ICTEL FaBneBook Enter BETUBR FiB Quir Fig UTL201 MCU Panel for M ARRAY 2 1 1 Adjustable parameters 1 a Monitoring Angle b Attenuators c Phasers AXIS 330 NANCO UTL 2 20 OCT 1995 Sottware Utilities MCU 2 1 2 Command set 2 els 2 lt 5 gt Quick selection for preset simulation angles Fl Help Help Screen CTRL PgUp Incr CTRL PgDn Decr Value Stepping keys lt Enter gt RETURN Return with value settings FlO Quit Return without any settings 2 2 Changing data values Data values are changed by moving the cursor highlight with the lt Up Down gt arrow keys to the desired datafield The value of the numeric datafields Mon Angle and Attenuators can be changed with value stepping keys lt PgUp PgDn gt The
116. aracters will be truncated 4 3 F10 Menu Use the lt F10 gt key to escape to the Menu if desired The lt F10 gt will stop executing and escape from anywhere in the program to a higher level 4 4 CR Continue Starts the graphic screen computation of the Bend Analysis AXIS 330 NANCO BND 12 20 AUG 1994 Software Bend Analysis Mode 5 Graph Diagram 5 1 Graphic Screen The result of computation are hyperbolic curves which represents the possible origin of the bends on the chosen projection level Every bend point will have its own curve and in case of the common bend source object the curves will be crossing each other How to find the origin of the bends is described in chapter 6 of this section At the bottom row are shown the keys to be used to modify the graphic result These keys are divided into two groups 1 position adjustment keys O DI PgUp PgDn 2 function keys F1 B amp W F2 Invert F3 Print F4 Save Bocurentat ion Bond fmalysis Treck AZ 0 0 Proj level On T AXIS 330 E Le TS km 5 a aoe a i a enn h a se ul 100n div Sa les 123 E Er E I 2 8 Poly Pode FDU CF2 Iwwert FS Priet F4 Save Fig BND501 A typical Graph screen in the Bend Analysis mode after three entered bend points 5 2 Position Adjustments 00 OO PgUp PgDnl For zooming in there are four adjustable position parameters
117. area border type border can be a continuous line or shows the sheet orientation S catter selection of scattering sheets W orst Case the sheet rotation step for finding the worst case Y axisscan sideways scanning mode selection 2 4 Commands 4 There are nine command in the Data Panel allowing the data entry or control the program execution F8 Sheet Data entry for the scattering object 1 Scan area Data entry for the scanning area 2 Display Data entry for the runway and the taxiway 3 RX position Data entry for receiver position or track F2 Change Data entry for other calculation parameters F3 Text Text entry description added into the graph F4 Limit of Bend Data entry for the maximum bend F6 DATA XL Nama and save a file for computed area F9 Display a table of computed data CR Continue Starts the Sensitive Area computation AXIS 330 NANCO SNS 4 20 JAN 2005 Software Sensitive Area Mode 3 Data Entry Numeric data entry is divided into five parts as follows 1 the scattering sheet 2 the scanning area 3 the display data 4 the RX position track and 5 the calculation parameters The numeric data is entered by a key shown between brackets allowing to change the value of the numeric data The present value is always shown between angle bracket Enter new value from the keyboard or press Enter to keep the present value 3 1 Scattering Sheet F8 The scattering sheet is entered by
118. ase defined as the 150 Hz sideband sum vector relative to the carrier part in the CSB reference signal S BO Amplitude SBO Phase Scattering Object Editor of this manual Sum of Depth of modulation defined as m150 4 m90 A deviation of 387uA or a DDM at 40 is the maximum Any value above this correspond to increased SDM while DDM will remain atthe maximum value Sideway SetUp section ofthis manual Two antennas GP type where Sensitive Area Mode SSL Sideways Slope Step Hgt TABL Table result of the analysis TaxiW Taxiway Tilt Vertical Angle of the scattering object THEO Theodolite THR Threshold TX Transmitter uA Micro Ampere AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 AX3 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual V VRT Vertical Trace mode W R With Reflector WND Window diagram section of this manual Xinc Xing Hgt Yinc AXIS330 NANCO AX3 6 20 AUG 1994 Software Appendix 4 Questions and Answers A4 i AXIS User s Manual A4 ii 20 AUG 1994 Questions and Answers Appendix4 About the answers This appendix provides answers to the mostcommonly asked questions about the AXIS software The answers is provided AS IS based withoutany warranty of any kind Whatis a printer driver A printer driver is a memory resident utility that is loaded by the batch file AL BATand GP BAT justbefore the main software is loaded from the disk into the computer memory A printer driver is necessary to enable p
119. ation load and remove the driver automatically every time the AXIS software is used If the graph is not printed properly repeat the procedure descripted above and try another printer types until the printer works If this will not work a new printer driver for the particular printer is need ed Examples The row in AL BAT and GP BAT file that loads the printer driver could be like grafplus 1 IBM or EPSON Dot matrix Portrait direction grafplus 1 IBM or EPSON Dot matrix Landscape direction graflasr 13 HP laser types or compatibles Portrait direction 20 AUG 1994 A4 1 AXIS User s Manual graflasr 13 HP laser types or compatibles Landscape direction The character in front of the printer type is the processing command None Printin Landscape direction P rintin portrait direction Default in axis amp Printin colours Printtext as graphics l P rint with extended clipping options use EDITGRAF Printin reversed Black White The rmgraf line removes the driver from the memory after use Can the printout be changed in size and position The size of the printed screen is preset to 6 4 by 5 0 inches You can change this permanently to any desired size by running EDITGRAF and answerthe questions Also the position on the paper GRAFLASR can be adjusted to make sure the graph is not printed on top of the feed parameters or list of scattering objects A recommended value is a 0 5 offsetacross and 6 down
120. aver F4 Save Note This function is enabled and displayed only when the screen is se lected as black amp white The Graph Saver is used to save the graphic screen to the disk on a selected SHOW directory The names of the files will be generated automatically and the first save is named as AXGO BAS second AXG1 BAS third AXG2 BAS and so on Before saving go to the Playback menu item on the Main Menu and select the wanted directory by the PgUp PgDn keys See the PLY section The saving format is the basic language BSAVE BLOAD mode enabling the fastest Load and play back in the AXIS 330 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 FIX 13 AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO FIX 14 20 OCT 1997 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS330 User s Manual GND Ground Current Mode Table of Content 1 Description seseeeeee 2 Data Panel 3 Data Entry 3 1 Start Distance 3 2 Stop Distance 3 9 Step size eem 3 8 1 Step Distance 3 3 2 Grid Spacing 3 4 Sideways Track 4 Toggles 4 1 D isplay 4 2 P arameter 5 Commands 5 1 F2 Change 5 2 FS Text Re ne de P Dai elei 5 9 F6 e trate Pa e ee One we RRA IER ctn 5 4 F10 Menu 5 5 CR Continue 6 Table display EE E T ERR tar Rent Enr MORIAR Te Graphic Display rire here frere nn n 7 1 Graphic diagrams
121. been carried out are named in brackets after the change description AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JUN 2005 GEN 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 Manual 4 1 Purpose and Scope This manual provides instructions on using AXIS 330 to make a glide path simu lation You will find it useful regardless of your level of computer expertise This user s guide assumes you are familiar with the ILS theory and the concepts that pertain to the ILS glide path At the end of this manual in the Appendix 3 AX3 there are briefly described the common definitions and abbreviations used in the AXIS 330 4 2 Organization This manual is divided into sections Each section describes completely one module of the program Three letters code are added into the page numbering for helping a search List of Sections AXIS 330 NANCO Software GEN General Introduction this section CPN Control Panel This section introduces how to enter all electrical and mechanical parameters of the current GP system SET SetUp A sub unit of the Control Panel for changing the default settings UTL Utilities A sub unit of the Control Panel reserved for Utility routines including ADU amp MCU simulation unit Reflection Plane RPL slope computa tion and Optimizing utility SCA Scattering object editor A module for entering and modifying up to 16 scattering objects PLY Playback Screens mode A module for displaying the saved screen as a s
122. bend pattern is a cut through a complex volume of longitudinal and lateral waves The bends will be shifted and change in appearance even for small devia tions from the ideal track The tracker or theodolite correction for deviation from the wanted track is only a fixed value for the assumed average displacement sensitivity making the curve look straight even when the aircraft is moving up and down from the intended track This works fine when there are no bends on the curve As soon as they appear the theodolite correction will not be able to make the received bend pattern look like the pattern along the ideal track For azimuth deviations from the localiser course line no corrections are done but the bend pattern is likely to be different It is practical impossible to fly exactly the same track twice so for say 10 approaches non of them would be identical GP zem Fig BND 610 A track along the localiser course line can be difficult to follow in windy conditions The simulations in the next two figures were done with a track on the localiser course line and a track offset of 22m closer to the GP mast The tracking example shows one constant track offset of 22m corresponding to 0 3 azimuth at 4km distance This may very well occur if there are varying crosswind along the track When picking bend points from a flight inspection curve watch the tracker curves and do the corresponding offsets in the inputs for GP angle and azimuth offset
123. cal parameter one gets a useful animation tool for showing the total impact of gradually increasing errors when they are replayed as a movie It can also be used to show the difference between two or more very close looking graphs to compare the impact of a new parameter Use the PgUp PgDn keys to switch between the graphs When the graphic screen is selected Black amp White the F4 Save function is enabled allowing to save the screen as a file on the disk to the selected directory The files will be named AXGO BAS AXG1 BAS AXG2 BAS etc automatically The default directory is SHOW When the playback is started by the lt F2 gt Show command all screen files of the selected directory will be played back in the same order as saved The show will repeat displaying the screen files from the first to the last one until any key is hit AXIS 330 NANCO pou 20 AUG 1994 PLY 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Command Screen Before starting the Playback Screen Show you may select another directory for the screen files Note The chosen directory remains selected as long as you run the AXIS 330 and all saved graphic screens will be saved to this directory There are eight commands available in the Command Screen of the Playback Screen files 1 PgUp PgDn Show directory quick selection 2 lt F2 gt Show Start show 3 lt F4 gt Delete all Screen files deletion 4 lt F5 gt Newdirectory Set your own show directory 5 lt F6 gt
124. celled Forward Bixtance from CP Fig UTL503 Display for entering the forward distance of the object Sideways Distance The sideways distance is the lateral distance between the GP centerline and midpoint of the object Use negative values towards runway regardless if it is on the right hand or left hand side of the GP antenna AXIS 330 NANCO UTL 16 20 AUG 1994 ENS Utilities Optimizing er Fig UTL504 Display for entering the sideways distance of the object Height Above GP zero The height of the scattering object above GP zero can be entered in meters or as vertical angle Use the F2 key to toggle between the meter and the angle entry mode Height Akova GF Zaro XF23 H ng X Fig UTL505 Display for entering the height above GP zero 5 3 G round Current reduction F6 If the reflection plane has a discontinuity in front of the GP antenna the ground current will also get a discontinuity causing diffracted signal to be radiated During the optimizing process the AXIS 330 will first compute the feeds in the antenna system so that the ground current will cease at a defined location on the reflection plane It is not necessary that the ground current drops to zero at this point so the feeds are modified to a better practical value by reducing the RT to a lower value RTr RTr 50 2 RT 50 3 formula UTL 01 The RTr values will be set on the system and shown on the Control Panel A
125. ched to them At the bottom of the graph the text Not completed will appear Note Stop distance must be greater than start distance 3 2 3 Longitudinal Step X Increment m 10 The test process moves the scattering object longitudially forward with this increment X inc The default step is 10m 3 2 4 Scan Width Scan width m 152 The maximum lateral distance of the scan even if the sensitive area extends outside this distance Note This value must be increased if the boarder of the sensitive area seems to extend beyond this width wider on the graphs AXIS 330 NANCO SNS 6 20 AUG 1994 Software Sensitive Area Mode 3 2 5 Lateral Step Side Increment m 10 gt The test process moves the scattering object laterally sideways with this incre ment Y inc The default step is 10m 3 3 Display data 2 The display data is comprising of the x axis range of the graph and the position of thetaxiway Whether the runway and the taxiway should be shown on the graph is depending on the setting of the Add toggle The display data entry is selected by the 2 key number two Note The RWY dist is the Sideways distance and can be set in the Control Panel BIS Fhe ILE GLIDEP amp IS ZIHSLATOR CSM Graph diztamczz Display rasga m 1888 fact uay dirt im ab l Fig SNS302 Data Entry for Display Settings 3 3 1 Length of the X axis Display X range m lt 1000 gt
126. corresponding to 0 64 rad s Foraircraft simulations the speed may be setin the range of 90 150kts For conservative results with less filtering use the speed ofthe slowestaircraftoper ating on the particularrunway 0 1 1 0 10 100 1000 rad s Low Pass Filter response D o Fig AX1 501 The digital filter response in the frequency domain where the cutoff frequency is shown for 10 rad sec and the asymptotic cutoff 6 dB octave or 20 dB decade AXIS 330 NANCO AX1 12 20 UN 2005 Software AXIS 330 User s Manual AX2 Appendix 2 Files in the AXIS 330 Table of Contents Directory SUCH c nn a nn Re ses nn 1 Apr erosion 2 SPOTS GP ANN c 3 AThe fle GP RUN c in trato de dede cera od Le CN a 4 5S Thehle GPiDOB icit AS Nae en reb bie Hula 6 GMI TS GP LQ ss iuto opium Dea ie da ute Mu E eus 7 AXIS330 NANCO Software 20 UN 2005 AX2 i AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS330 NANCO AX2 ii 20 UN 2005 Software Appendix 2 Files in the AXIS 330 1 Directory structure In the single user version of the AXIS 330 the installation will generate three main directories as follows 1 homedir AXIS This is the main directory including all files necessary to run the AXIS 330 2 homedir AXIS WORK The default directory for library working files examples etc In addition there are optional WOR Knn directories for separate working files that can be selected with the P gUp P gDn keys The number nn will r
127. d of the F2 Language change row If you do not want to change the language just press lt enter gt NOTE Remember to press F3 to save the selection AXIS 330 NANCO SET 8 20 NOV 1994 Software SetUp 5 2 Save F3 F3 SAVE this as the Default setup The F3 will save the configuration permanently into the file GP 002 as the new Default SetUp and the program will return to the Control Panel with the new configuration settings 5 3 Rename default directories F4 F4 Rename WORK SHOW Default Directories Use F4 to enter new names for the WORK and SHOW directories When using another language than English other names may look better for the users If WORK is renamed you should move the content of WORK into the NEW one to ease finding all earlier used files To change name follow these steps 1 Open the renaming panel by the F4 key The existing directory names are shown in parenthesis 2 Type new name s max 5 characters and lt enter gt or press just lt en ter to keep a name Note Longer directory name s than five characters is truncated 3 Setup Data Panel appears Proceed to the Command Panel by press ing lt enter gt 4 Save the setting by the F3 key AKIS JIM ILS GLIDEPSTH SEHULRTOH CHE END CT mae l Mark directory WORKS SANCIE Graph directory SWOW POI Fig SCA503 The directories renaming 5 4 Delete User s Code lt F5 gt F5 Delete User Co
128. de The F5 will clear the GP 001 file that contains the user code This will disable the usage of the AXIS 330 software Before doing the deletion the AXIS 330 will ask Are you sure Y N By pressing the Y key the deletion will take place and the AXIS 330 execution will be halted Any other key will return the program to the Control Panel The user s code deletion will prevent others from using the software as well as enabling you to enter a new User Code if you are given a new access level Note Use this before entering a new user code with higher access as this is the only way of preparing for re entering the user code AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 NOV 1994 SET 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 5 Save current Run Toggle settings F6 Save current Run Toggle settings This will keep most of the current settings you have in the run modes as starting distance increment graph scale etc It will also save some of the toggle settings like graph direction etc Whenever the software is started these values will be the default 5 6 Delete Run Toggle settings F7 Delete Run Toggle settings This will cancel the saving done by F6 and the software will start up with its own default values 5 7 Cancel CR No Change The Enter choice will cancel all changes and the program returns to the Con trol Panel without any change AXIS 330 NANCO SET 10 20 NOV 1994 PRS AXIS 330 User s Manual UTL U
129. ding four com mands F2 Language change F3 Save settings as the default setup F4 Rename Work Graph Directories F5 Delete the User Code F6 Save current Run Toggle settings F7 Delete Run Toggle settings CR No Change AKIS TIH ILE GLIDEFATM 5EIPMSLATOH CSM XFP E r7 EH change GEY Fl SAUER this ar the Default setup iFA Rename the Work feaph directories FR Pelete the User Code F6 Bave current Rum Togagle settings C F75 Befault HunzToggle sect ings ZCH Hn Change Fig SET501 The Command Panel of the SetUp utility 5 1 Language F2 F2 Language change GB The language selection is based to the language files GP10 nn GP11 nn and GP12 nn Where the nn extension represents the country code For example gb Great Britain n Norway s Sweden etc Purpose of three language files are GP10 nn Help screens for a scattering object editor GP11 nn Help screen called from the Control Panel GP12 nn All modules and functions declaring texts The command lt F2 gt opens the screen where you can see all the GP10 nn files available On the first row you are asked to enter the extension part country code and then press lt enter gt Enter the File extension country code aem list below Bawis GB 5 _ Gris GH Gril N Gris FR ZSAIEHdH Buter Free Fig SET502 The screen for the language selection If the country code exists you will see your selection in the parenthesis at the en
130. dolite HGT above GP zero is the height of the theodolite eye relative to the GP zero 3 1 4 Theodolite upward tilt angle Theo upwards tilt 3 Mechanical tilt of the theodolite vertical pilot axis This type of theodolite will point at O elevation angle when rotated to 90 in azimuth The theodolite rotation axis will normally be exactly vertical and not tilted relative to the reflection plane FSL and SSL Note This option will appear when the AXIS 330 is started with the THEO switch 3 2 Elevation Angle Elevation Angle lt 3 This value is preset to the GP angle set in the Control Panel The run follows the Glide path angle down according to the tracking mode 3 3 Level run Level feet lt 1500 gt The fixed height in feet above the GP zero level The default value is 1500 ft Note This entry replaces the elevation angle in case of the level tracking mode 3 4 Sideways offset SDW offset m 122 This is the sideways offset of the track and is preset to RWY Track along the Runway Centerline 3 5 Track Azimuth Track azimuth lt 0 gt The Azimuth Angle relative to the GP centerline normally identical to the localiser Courseline Positive angles are in clockwise direction according to the geograph ical convention 3 6 Start distance Start Distance m 8000 The beginning of the run Default start distance is 8 km plus the threshold dis tance to include the ILS point A at
131. downward extended course line between ILS point A and B above the THR ILS Datum Step hgt the height of a terrain step or a variation of the terrain slopes between the GP mast and the runway threshold See usage description in chapter 3 8 in this section AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 6 20 AUG 1994 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software Control Panel 3 Data Entry In the Control Panel the data fields can be highlighted and the value or setting can be changed on the screen directly Data values are changed by moving the cursor with arrow keys to the desired data field and then using the value stepping keys Note The Home and End keys can be used to move cursor directly in the first or last data field The value stepping keys are Increment Decrement Factor Insert lt Delete gt 0 1 lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt 1 lt ctrl PgUp gt lt ctrl PgDn gt 10 3 1 Site Data There are seven parameters in the Site Data as follows 1 GP Type Glide path type 2 FRQ MHz Operating Frequency 3 GP Angle Glide Path Angle 4 FWD Slope Forward Slope 5 SDW Slope Sideways Slope 6 RWY Dist Runway Distance and 7 Refl Pln Type of Reflection Plane 3 1 3 1 3 1 1 GlidePath type GP Type There are three GP types available in the AXIS 330 M ARRAY CEGS SIDBAND REF NULL REF Make a selection with lt PgUp gt or lt PgDn gt keys 2 Operating Frequency FRQ MHz The operating RF frequency can b
132. duce the impact of snow on the reflection area Another reason is to prevent it from screening the signals going directly to the far field L e Nominal monitor positior Longer distance Fig CPN308 CourseLine Monitor Sideways positioning AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 2002 CPN 17 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 7 Transmitter Data The modulation balance in the CSB signal from modulator is fixed to OuA The SUM is the modulation sum in the CSB signal is fixed to 80 3 7 1 SBO amplitude from cabinet SBO from TX Ampl dB This SBO amplitude displays the general SBO amplitude from the modulator in decibel dB Changes can be done in 0 01 dB steps Nominal value is 0 dB Note Data entry step will always be in percent while it is displayed in dB s so the displayed steps might be uneven jumps 3 7 2 SBO phase from cabinet SBO from TX Phas This SBO phase displays the general phase from the modulator The nominal value is 0 3 8 Threshold Data 3 8 1 Threshold Distance Thr dist m The Thr distis the longitudinal distance from the GP mastto the threshold This data value is depending mainly on the FSL and theStep Height 3 8 4 The SSL is not affecting the Threshold Distance because the GP cone is tilted along Note This data is calculated automatically and can not be changed by the user 3 8 2 Threshold Height Thr hgt m
133. e 1 F2 Load 2 F3 Save file 3 F4 Kill file 4 F5 New directory 5 F7 Description 6 F8 Make new directory The default directory is the WORK subdirectory under the AXIS directory The keys PgUp and lt PgDn gt is used to scroll through directories named WORK1 through WORK50 4 7 1 Load F2 The Load command is activated by F2 and is used to load earlier saved model to the AXIS 330 The screen shows all model setup files in the selected directory On the first line in the middle of the screen is a 21 character long description of the highlighted file SEIE FPA ILE ULIDEFSTE SIHOLATOR CROMIOBH OCR te slept Test sebwp Esp te gene THT 4 CDOCEM STRPORT PESTHITR Bytes Free Fig CPN403 Typical Load Screen Move cursor with the arrow keys and press Enter for loading the highlighted file into the AXIS 330 Press Esc to return without loading any file 4 7 2 Save F3 AXIS 330 NANCO Te 20 AUG 1994 CPN 23 AXIS 330 User s Manual The Save command is activated by F3 and is used to save the model in the selected directory The command will open two fields which you have to enter for saving the file SEI FHA IL GLIDEPSTS ZIHSLATOH CEk Middd Eater file manc En Erm te camal Serrriptism mp I Erizrtimg text masa Fig CPN404 Typical Save Screen 1 Enter file name Esc to cancel Type the file name 7 characters max and then press l
134. e This function is enabled and displayed only when the screen is se lected as black amp white The Graph Saver is used to save the graphic screen to the disk on a selected SHOW directory The names ofthe files will be generated automatically and the first save is named as AXGO BAS second AXG1 BAS third AXG2 BAS and so on Before saving go to the Playback menu item on the Main Menu and select the wanted directory See the PLY section The saving format is the basic language BSAVE BLOAD mode enabling the fastest Load and play back in the AXIS 330 AXIS 330 NANCO Software SNS 16 20 AUG 1994 AXIS 330 User s Manual AXI Appendix 1 Glide P ath Model Table of Contents TI DescrDUGI zo i cp o atas a ito ne 1 2 Antenna Syste Missieri inner tannins 2 3 Reflection P lanena a aaa i 3 3 1 Forward Slope FS Lists anale 3 3 2 SideWays Son SSL doo santa 3 3 3 Reflection P lane Dy PCs sso vd AE en UR i Esa A RUE 4 3 4 Penetration D pliant Rd Od 4 3D SNOW layers RET PER 4 4 Adverse environment model 5 4 T TheRectangularSTl6eet c eo biadeperr e a FERAE UR MADE vial id bea b evan 5 4 1 LReflecHalsoos oi ia vo Ce a dead ct der ra 6 41 2 Diffraction i iranin tutti anni 6 4 1 35h3d0WITIg sinna a NN Marti Li 7 4 2 The Wire SECTION issus eia aiie 7 4 3 The Semispheric Hill TOp s s sssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnnne 7 4 4 The Ridges or earth Walls serres 9 4 5 The Truncated Ground Planes usse o
135. e W nd toggle starts three dimensional graphic utilizing the vertical trace mode graphic Actually the program execution will jump to the data panel of the vertical trace mode with changed toggle settings That toggle W nd lt gt 3D is added into the vertical trace toggles allowing to return to the window overview mode See details in para 6 2 in this section AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 WND 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 Commands 5 1 F2 Change The Change command is used to modify the values of the numeric data used in the computation See chapter 3 Data Entry of this section 5 2 F3 Text The F3 text command is used to enter a text description into the graph After pressing F3 the user is asked to enter a new text Description nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Enter new Text _ Type the new text max 21 characters that should go along with the graph or just press Enter to leave the present text Note Any longer text than 21 characters will be truncated 5 8 F10 Menu Function key lt F10 gt returns the program execution to the Main menu 5 4 Continue CR Starts the window diagram computation AXIS 330 NANCO WND 6 20 AUG 1994 Sotware Window Overview Mode 6 Graphic Display There are two graphic types in the Window overview mode 1 Two dimensional 2 Three dimensional In the Data Panel of the Window overview the 2D graphic is started by lt enter gt whereas 3D gra
136. e RIGHT fConneotu r PROFF Rove to a biger Control or Connector Rove to a lower Control or Connector u Falp Rove olidee to the LEFT lt Conn otos ORF Fair House lider ta the EIGHT i Conneotar ORFS COTELIFGU Rowe lider FAST t the LEFT CTELIFaPn Rove lider FAST t the EIGHT cece cM FIRM He Fig UTL203 Help Screen 2 3 3 Value stepping keys CTRL PgUp Incr CTRL PgDn Decr Value stepping keys are used to change the parameter values Note The phase shifters are slider type adjusters and the values are ad justed with the lt Left Right gt arrow keys 2 3 4 Returning with value settings lt Enter gt RETURN By pressing lt Enter gt key the software return to the Control Panel and MCU settings will be effective 2 3 5 Returning without any settings F10 Quit The lt F10 gt returns the program execution to the Control Panel with original set tings AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 UTL 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 ADU adjustments The ADU adjustments contain three Antenna Distribution Unit ADU Panels and can be used to simulate adjustments directly on the selected ADU type which can be brought up on the screen The phases and amplitude ratios between the antennas can be changed by mov ing the controls with arrow keys One may also disconnect some signal compo nents inside the Unit to simulate termination into 50 ohms dummy load ARTE 338 ILE GLIBEPATH amp EIBMUERTOR c5 HrBER Ant
137. e a positive number 3 3 4 Scale Center Graph Scale Centerline uA lt 0 gt The scale center can be offset to zoom in small changes around any deviation value Note If D isplay toggle is selected as a TABL the scale center is disabled AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 FIX 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 Toggles There are six toggles in the fixed position mode allowing you quickly change some of the often used settings Pressing the key shown between the brackets will execute the function 4 1 d B or 96 Selection for the amplitude diagrams CSB or SBO y axis unit 926 Amplitudes will display in percent dB Amplitudes will display in decibel 10 dB div 4 2 D isplay Selection for the output of the computed results GRAF Computed result will be displayed in graph form TABL Computed result will be displayed in table form 4 3 E rase Selection for erasing the earlier computed data OK the old data in the memory will be erased and a new curve may now be computed DATA the memory still contains the last results and the curve may be displayed again with altered toggle or scale settings 4 4 I ncr x Selection for the x axis increment factor during computation The factor will decrease the selected increment step in order to increase the resolution of the curve 1 Resolution will be as selected for increment step Vp Double resolution VA Resolution will increase by four 4 5 N Points Selection f
138. e be made according to figure SCA401 The plate model should have the same haight as the tailfin but the width should be determined at about 2 3 of the tailfin height 2 3 height Real tailfin Plate model Fig SCA401 The plate model compared to the real tailfin AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 FEB 201 0 SCA 2 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual Blank page AXIS 330 NANCO S CA 22 Software AXIS 330 User s Manual PLY Playback Screen files Table of Content d Description a od e nh eI CE HENCE EM 1 2 Command Scr en ecce tace tante te ER rx rr needed nere 2 1 Show directory quick selection 2 2 Starting show sss 2 3 Screen files deletion essssseeeeeeeeneennes 2 4 Set your own show directory 2 5 Go to DOS ss 2 6 Make a directory label 2 7 Make a new show directory 2 8 LP PA ERES 3 Speed Control of the slide show AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 PLY i AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO Software PLY ii 20 AUG 1994 Playback Screen files 1 Description Playback Screen files option is used to show previously computed and saved graph screens in Black amp White After a number of graphic screens have been saved on the disk they can be seen like a slide show by this Playback option By computing and saving several screens with increasing change in a feed or mechani
139. e dimensional Glidepath antennas A1 is the lowest antenna and A3 the highest one Antenna Array Designer section of this manual Antenna Distribution Unit This unit is between antenna array and the transmitter dividing the signals CSB SBO C CSB C SBO from the transmitter to the antenna ele ments of the array Audio Frequency Amplitude File extension for antenna system files Approach mode section of this manual Antenna A physical device that converts a RF signal in cable into an electromagnetic field in space A number of antenna elements arranged in a group in order to direct the RF signal in certain directions and or avoiding RF signal into other directions A physical unit consisting of one or more tuned radiating devices connected to a single feeder cable Att Attenuation ASY File name extension for antenna array systems AZ Azimuth AX1 AX4 Appendices of this manual BAL Modulation balance The amplitude of both navigation modulation 90Hz and 150Hz are equal BBP Beam Bend Potential The maximum possible bend ampli tude along the course line if 10096 of the radiated SBO signal in a given azimuth angle is reflected into the course line BND Bend Analysis mode section of this manual Btm Hgt Bottom Height scattering object B amp W Black amp White AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 AX3 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual C Capture Ratio The ratio between the course and clearance carrier ampli t
140. e entered as the GP or the corresponding LLZ frequency selectable by lt Alt F gt Selection between 20 and 40 channels is made by lt Alt E gt 3 GlidePath Angle GP Angle This is the nominal GP angle relative to the horizontal level This angle is adjusta ble between 1 5 and 15 with 0 01 steps 20 AUG 1994 CPN 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 1 4 Forward Slope FSL FWD Slope or The Forward Slope is the average weighted slope of the first 300m of the reflect ing plane in front of the GP mast The first 20 180m are very important for the induced ground current while remaining zone has decreasing effect in determin ing the average forward slope Slope neg Fig CPN301 The GP Angle and Forward Slope The FSL is positive when the terrain rises from the GP mast towards the far field The hotkey lt Alt S gt toggles the slope between degrees or percent Note The reflection plane computation routine can be used F4 Util to calculate weighted FSL 3 1 5 Sideways Slope SSL SDW Slope or The Sideways Slope SSL is the average slope of the reflection plane perpen dicular to the runway centerline The SSL might have several values at different distances due to the twisted terrain and it is the effective reflection zone between the antennas and the Ap proach minimum height DH that should be considered The SSL is defined positive if the ground slopes upwards towards the runway
141. e is a distance increment between each computation The default value is 5m in the state of the Display toggle GRAPH The default value is 50m in the state of the Display toggle TABL 3 3 2 Grid Spacing Grid Spacing m lt 50 gt The Grid Spacing defines a grid size for 3D mode for setting a coarser or a finer grid pattern 3 4 Sideways Track The Sideways Track distance is referred to the centerline in front of the GP mast Note This Entry is only done for Table or 2D graphic The 3D graphic will always display the fixed area from 150m to 250m sideways from the GP mast AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 GND 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 Toggles 4 1 D isplay The Display toggle is used to select display mode between 2D or 3D graph or table form 2D Two dimensional graph will be displayed The 2D graph will show a straight line in dB s according to the numeric data settings GRAPH TABL 3D Computed results will be displayed as two dimensional graphic Computed results will be displayed in table form This selection also enables an Excel readable file to be generated The F6 command key invokes this file generation Three dimensional graph carpet will be displayed The 3D graph will show the entire reflection plane from Start to Stop distance in front of the GP mast with a selected grid resolution 4 2 P arameter The Parameter toggle is used to select either CSB SBO or CLR ground cur
142. e is the longitudinal distance from the GP mast Sideways Distance Receiver Sdw dist m 122 gt The receiver sideways distance is the lateral distance from the GP mast Height Receiver height m lt 30 01 gt The receiver height is the height above the GP zero foot of the mast Note The shadowed value on the right side between brackets is the calcu lated height of the ILS point C with the selected elevation angle AXIS 330 NANCO Software SNS 8 20 AUG 2002 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Sensitive Area Mode 3 4 2 Track Rx Receiver Track The receiver will start at ILS pt A and follow the extended glidepath angle eleva tion angle downwards passing the threshold at 15m height 3 4 2 1 Start Distance Receiver start m 7694 The receiver start is the start distance of the track measured from the GP mast Default value is ILS point A but can be setto any positive value greater than the stop distance 3 4 2 2 Stop Distance selectable Receiver stop m 286 The receiver stop is the stop distance of the track measured from the LLZ array These are the default options when pressing the T key PtA B Anormaltrack range for Low Visibility landings PtA C Atesttrack down to Cat specification PtA T Atesttrack down to Cat Il amp III specification NOTE Onlythe first Track Option Pt A B represents the conditions during Low Visibility Procedures The next aircraft should be no closer than
143. e moved by using the Left or Right arrow keys Pressing the arrow key the cursor will move along the curve while the value of the selected parameter and the distance will be displayed in the upper left hand part of the graphic screen With Left and Right arrows the cursor is moving with one computed step increment selected in data panel while holding the Ctrl key the steps will be 10 times larger Lateral Trace Fil IBBBE B Siu 122 CBE gi Fan ziBHgA Ctr FORAY FZ Iwwert CE3OFEIwt Fd nase Ualuea 5 Fig LAT702 Azimuth angle and parameter reading of the cursor location AXIS 330 NANCO LAT 12 20 AUG 1994 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS 330 User s Manual VRT Vertical Trace Mode Table of Content L DESCrIPHONEEE SERA tee et AAS A ech acta E TEAT ete bor 1 2 Data Panel eie slvaaeeedlctyaccesuveaceesnunvaciceeudeaydcenetieh daceetee 2 1 Table of Numeric data 1 2 2 Toggle Panel 2 2 3 Command POW 9 22 eet repe erreur eb aria ener 3 Data maa A E ne HR e aS ee en IR IGNI 3 1 Forward Distance 3 2 Sideways Distance 3 3 Minimum Angle 3 4 Maximum Angle 3 5 Increment 3 6 Graphic Centerline eene 9 7 Description teXb eot EE OT EU TEE OT TOU EROR 4 Toggles 4 1 A mplitude 4 2 Display etn eme eerie 4 3
144. e radiating pattern is very much depending on the ground plane in front of the antenna The model assumes that this reflection plane is a homogeneous and straight with a given forward FSL and sideways SSL slope The type of ground is determining how much signal will be reflected at different elevation angles The reflection plane is modelled as a set of image antennas under the earth surface The reflecting properties are simulated to be homogeneous for several types of ground from Perfect Conducting to Concrete Note The model DO NOT calculate the effect of the geographical geome try but it assumes the surroundings of the airport is flat 3 1 Forward Slope FSL The Forward Slope is the average weighted slope of the first 300m of the re flecting plane The first 20 180m are very important for the induced ground current while remaining zone has decreasing effect in determining the average forward slope 3 2 Sideways Slope SSL The Sideways Slope SSL is the average slope of the reflection plane perpen dicular to the centerline in front of the GP antennas near threshold The SSL might have several values at different distances due to the twisted terrain and it is the effective reflection zone between the antennas and the Approach minimum height DH that should be considered AXIS 330 NANCO se 20 AUG 1999 AX1 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 3 Reflection Plane type The reflection plane of the GP site will in practice
145. e scatter object from the file scatt gb 2 2 4 Rotation Angle Rot The rotation angle of the scattering object is the horizontal angle between the object and the GP centerline The clockwise rotation is entered as a positive value and the negative value represents the counter clockwise rotation Rotation angle X8 to CL f negative Scattering sheet positive Fig SCA208 Display for entering the rotation angle of the sheet AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 SCA 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 2 5 Tilt angle of the sheet Tilt The tilt angle of the scattering sheet is the vertical angle between the object and the perpendicular to the ground The clockwise tilt as seen from the GP mast is entered as a positive value while the negative value represents the counter clockwise tilt Tilt angle of reflection sheet lt gt Tilt 95 4 44 156Hz T 96Hz r 7 Lit 2 s 7 i Ci RWY Antennas Scattering sheet Fig SCA209 Display for entering the tilt angle of the sheet 2 2 6 Reflection Factor Rfl The reflection factor is the ratio between incident and reflected rf signal The value of the factor is depending on the material of the object Generally the better conductivity and smoothness of the material the higher factor should be used Reflection factor 48 01 1 68 lt 1 Glass metal 9 5 Reflected Smooth metal 1 8 7 t L Antennas Scattering sh
146. e snow is entered The value of the dielectric constant is fixed to 80 to simulate water until a later release Snow Dielectric Const lt i 86 gt Ice New fallen Several Days Slightly Wet Very Wet 1 Mater 8 Relative Dielectric Constant lt Er Fig CPN408 Entering screen for a relative dielectric constant of snow 4 10 F10 End The lt F10 gt key will terminate the AXIS 330 Before terminating you are warned and prompted Are you sure Y N Pressing the Y key the program will exit Any other key will return to the Control Panel Note If another language than English is used the corresponding key for Y in the other language must be used AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 26 20 AUG 1994 s AXIS 330 NANCO Software Control Panel 5 Hot Keys There are many Hot Keys available in the Control Panel The Hot Keys or an Alt Key combination execute a given action immediately when pressed Here is a brief description about the Hot Keys in the Control Panel B Black amp White or Colours Hot key B is a toggle selecting screen between Colour and B amp W lt H gt hot keys table Hot key H shows the help screen about the hot keys SEIS iru TLS GLIDERS MT IPIE In EL E Bet keye Clmrtamt acties withest zrmhreqgmemt Ester beyti p Aleck amp White zr Ca aari 5 Thiz raam lImfe sm Morsiss Date M Mews im Doewerlepmest Q Qedt fran Csstrel Fasal See startap argunzmkz B Z
147. ease There can be only one G type scatter object ata time and itmustalways be entered as the first one AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 AX1 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 T he low pass filter The receiver and or plotter has a certain upper frequency limit for outputting fast scalloping The frequency where the amplitude of the bends has dropped 3dB will be the cutoff frequency This will be expressed in radians per second Q 2f rad s formula AX1 501 The software has a digital low pass filter to simulate this and the default value is setto 5 rad s as a measured average of available plotters Modern plotters might have up to 15 rad s so itis recommended thatthe user adjustthis value according to the actual equipment Use the F3 key in the Control Panel to change the defaultsetup If the receiver plotter outputspecifies a certain Time Constant the conversion to rad s will be as O T formula AX1 502 ICAO Annex10 Volume attachment C recommends a time constant of 50 V seconds where the ground velocity in kts og 92 6 V seconds where V is the velocoty in km per hour For 105 kts this will be 0 48 s corresponding to approximately 2 rad s response in the receiver Forstatic measurements where the receiver speed is setto Okts the receiver response setting has no effecton the output Forground measurements the vehicle normally drives along the runway centerline at60km h which corresponds to 32kts
148. ection UTL 4 5 F5 New This function gives you the default startup values and erase all entries previously set Alter the default values by using the F3 key to change the setup which is contained in the file GP INI Appendix AX2 describes the format and the content ofthe file GP INI 4 6 F6 Last The F6 key will load the setup you actually were running last time The file GP RUN contains this setup Every time you stop the AXIS 330 your setup is saved into the file GP RUN In the appendix A2 the format and the content of this file is described NOTE GP RUN is identical to the library files in the WORK directory 4 7 F7 File This function key F7 allows you handle load save kill your files on the disk SEIS FHA ILF ULIDEFSTS ZIMSLATOUH oH EE nm Merk direeteries Zeleot by Patp Palie Piles ASirerteru WORRY F7 Descriptiss Main working ile CPE vie CPE Meet CPAIEII1I CPROMeu Sirectery Fig CPN402 The screen after lt F7 gt selection AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 22 20 AUG 2003 Software Control Panel If running on a Local Network you may choose to handle files in the common area by pressing F2 or your own local area by pressing enter The common area is limited to only a WORK directory under the server AXIS directory Only the Network Manager is allowed to delete Kill files from the common area There are six function key commands availabl
149. ectory 4 7 5 Description lt F7 gt This command lets you write your own label in each directory Type the text and press lt enter gt to create the label This may be a simple description of what kind of files there are in this directory e g an airport name testing scatter objects etc Description g The label can be rewritten anytime 4 7 6 Create new directory lt F8 gt If a non existing directory is selected a warning will appear with a reminder that F8 can be pressed to create the directory After pressing F8 the warning disappears and the directory is ready for use Use the F7 to make a memo label forthe content SEIS FHA ILE ULIDEFSTS SIMNOLATOR CH pA ee Mark direoteries Relect hu PapzPaDa Piles Airerteru WORKI SP7 Dessriptiss Mis Air crpry Mers gpt guise FE re matt CPLM CPirERBeRO CPARE111 CPS Mey HSibertery Fig CPN406 Creating a new directory by F8 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 CPN 25 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 8 F8 Scatt This function enables insertion of the reflection objects into your simulation model Detailed description is given in the SCA section 4 9 F9 Snow The key F9 is used to enter snow layer on the reflection plane Snow Layer Depth CCR if none Cm lt B _ V lt Enter thickness Fig CPN407 Snow layer entering screen First the thickness of the snow layer is entered Secondly the dielectric constant of th
150. ed parameter 2 4 Command row 4 The commands effect the program execution or allow to enter some numeric data directly F2 Change Change the position of the fixed points F3 Text Enter a text line to be displayed with the graph diagram F4 FSD Change the Y scale Full Scale Deflection F5 Error Change the error parameter of the numeric data F6 Excel Enable an Excel readable file when in TABL mode F10 Menu Return to main menu lt CR gt Continue Start computing AXIS 330 NANCO cd 20 OCT 1997 FIX 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 Data Entry The data is entered by the F2 and the F5 keys The F2 is used to enter or modify the location s of the receiver fixed points The F5 is used to enter a simulated error The current value of the data is shown between angle brackets If you accept the shown value just press Enter to proceed to the next data entry Other wise enter the new value and press Enters 3 1 Position of the point s The position of the fixed points receiver position are entered by F2 In the title row between square brackets is displayed the monitor coordinates Note If only one point is selected by N toggle the entry includes only one point ARTS 33H ILS GLIBEFHTH SIMULATOR fZ HW BBHO ST Er gt med 5 H z Fnint Ho 1 smr Field Foie ile im 2 Side tm AS Tinlo RAM Helabt Above GF Zero CFZo ngl 531 975 Fuint Wo d Hear Fie
151. een the midpoint of the object and the GP mast measured along the centerline Note If the entered distance is zero the entry is cancelled Forward Distance from GP Fig SCA227 Display for entering the forward distance of the object 2 5 2 Sideways Distance Sdw The sideways distance is the lateral distance between the midpoint of the object and the GP centerline Use negative values towards runway regardless if it is to the right hand or left hand side of the GP antenna Sideways Distance from GP CL Cm lt Fig SCA228 Display for entering the sideways distance of the object AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 SCA 13 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 5 3 Height above GP Zero Hgt The height of the scattering object above GP zero can be entered in meters or vertical angles Press F2 to change the entry mode The default height is 10 m Height fibove GP Zero C L N GP zero Fig SCA229 Display for entering the height above GP zero 2 5 4 Reflection Factor Rfl The reflection factor is the ratio between incident and reflected rf signal The factor depends on the material of the object Generally the better conductivity and smoothness of the material the higher factor should be used Reflection Factor 48 801 1 Example 28 Reflection Factor 2 gt Press XFi15 for help Fig SCA230 Display for entering the reflection factor Use the following table F1 as a guide for
152. eet Fig SCA210 Display for entering the reflection factor A metallic grid with mesh width smaller than 0 1 wave lengths 9cm can be considered to be a continuous surface For wider grid or uneven surfaces made of concrete or glass the reflection factor could be set 0 5 0 1 AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 6 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 2 3 Wire section W This scattering type is used to simulate power or telephone lines 2 3 1 Forward Distance Fwd The forward distance is the longitudinal distance between the midpoint of the wire section and the GP mast measured along the GP centerline NOTE Ifthe entered distance is zero the entry is cancelled Forward Distance from GP Center of Wire section i lt FWD Distance gt i Fig SCA211 Display for entering the forward distance of the wire 2 3 2 Sideways Distance Sdw The sideways distance is the lateral distance between the midpoint of the wire section and the GP centerline Use negative values towards runway regard less if it is to the right hand or left hand side of the GP antenna Sideways Distance from GP CL Cm lt GP mast f negative m GP CL positive Scatter object Fig SCA212 Display for entering the sideways distance of the wire 2 2 4 Length of the wire section Lgt The default value of the length is 100m Length of wire section Cm lt 188 Wire secti
153. enna ixtrikutinn Unit Edpurtmaemtz F35 General HB Fib Hnrmarc arrap ABU zEtandard Typed P69 Hurrmarc Harray ABU Igge ES Fig UTL301 ADU type selection Note If SideBand Reference is selected in the Control Panel only General ADU is enabled and shown In case of Null Reference there is no ADU available due to the Null Reference antenna feeds are connect ed directly to the ILS modulator unit There are three ADU type available in AXIS 330 All ADUs are functionally quite similar so only M array General ADU is described in this section 3 1 ADU Panel The ADU panel can be divided into three parts 1 Adjustments 2 Connectors 3 Command Row ra u e 1 ae Phase LL Phase BO 1 Phase a Pi Selo CTRL Pe p lecr CCTRLI PaDe Decr lt Beter gt RETURN PitqQait Fig UTL302 ADU Panel General type for M array AXIS 330 UTL 6 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 Utilities ADU 3 1 1 Adjustments 1 The General type ADU includes three amplitude adjustments for M array extra signals and phase shifter as follows 1 RTC Extra signals CSB Amplitude ratio adjustment 2 RTS Extra signals SBO Amplitude ratio adjustment 3 A3 A1 Amplitude balance between upper and lower antenna 4 Phase A3 Phase Shifter for upper antenna 5 Phase SBO A1 Phase Shifter for SBO of the lower antenna 6 Phase A1 Phase Shifter for lower antenna Data values can be changed by moving the curso
154. ensitive or critical for ground movements ARRAY with otre elements Fate centerline CFIISAU FZ Eweert F3 FrIimt F4 Gaee Fig GND702 The SBO ground current for the M ARRAY system 7 2 Functions The functions of the graph display are F1 B amp W Black amp White to Colour Selector F2 Invert Invert the display colours for cut amp paste purposes F3 Print Print the curve to a printer F4 Save Save a B amp W graph for later playback 7 2 1 Black amp White to Colour Selector F1 B amp W This function is used to toggle the graph between colour and black amp white The F1 key will turn the graph into black background and white lines Re peating the F1 key will restore the colour display AXIS 330 NANCO Software GND 10 20 OCT 1997 Ground Current Mode 7 2 2 Display Inverter F2 Invert This function will invert the colours of the display for later grabbing and past ing the figure into a document In the colour display the colours will be changed to their complementary ones 7 2 3 Printout F3 Print This function allows the feed parameters and the graph to be printed out for documentation purposes Make sure that correct printer driver Grafplus or Graflasr is loaded before starting the AXIS 330 otherwise no graph will be printed only the text Normally this is done by the GP BAT file Note If you do not have a colour printer it is for some printertypes recom mended to change display
155. eon nodate Ale Window ocen From the sir ao default BLACK Remove colours to enable caving of graphio ooreeno con Foross ooreen into COA pode CUT Cut thy direct oignal From tke output leaving ooatter only pott Upeo PPH inotead of CRI in pH ao default PREMO Enables PEHY gode EF no uoer oode fo auaklakle EGA Faroes ooreen into EGA pode FEET Antenna BeigRto and distances in Foot on Control Fanel HEEG Foro s coreen into Herouleo mode LEFT GF antenna on FLY LEFT side ao default EBATE Mo datestine on cor en ok printout SCREEN Automatic obeok For Root ooreen tage For graphios SERSE BEeueroen tbe updown aenoe of the graphio curses THEO Enabling dos of tilt tope theodolites on approaches Ur Foross oreen into UGA pode Fig CPN502 The screen after hot key Z is pressed 1 Add 90 to General SBO phase Hot key 1 adds 90 to the SBO phase of the course transmitter 9 Add 90 to General SBO phase Hot key 9 adds 90 to the SBO phase of the course transmitter 0 Zero out the Offset and Fwd Dist Hot key 0 will zero out the Offset and FWD dist of all antenna This hotkey is enabled only if any Offset or FWD dist is highlighted lt Alt 1 2 3 gt toggle antenna 1 3 On Off Hot key lt Alt 1 2 3 gt toggles antenna 1 2 3 ON OFF lt Alt B gt Amplitudes in dB or 96 Hot key lt Alt B gt toggles all amplitudes between dB and lt Alt C gt Clearance T
156. ering sheet or selecting a load mode from SCATT UK by lt F2 gt Height Hgt The default height is 10 m for the sheet Height of Reflecting sheet C fintennas Scattering sheet Fig SCA205 Display for entering the height of the reflecting object Height of the sheet bottom Hgt Il The bottom height of the scattering object Default value is zero meaning the object stays on the ground In case of simulating the aircraft tailfins or the beam of a building crane the sheet should be lifted from the ground by setting the bottom height accordingly Height of sheet bottom edge Cm lt fintennas Fig SCA206 Display for entering the bottom height of the object Note Btm Hgt cannot be set to a lower value than zero meaning the object base is on the ground AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 4 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 2 2 3 2 Sheet size from the SCATT UK file After F2 is pressed the screen shows a scattering object from the file SCATT UK By using lt PgUp gt and lt PgDn gt keys you can scroll the objects of the file When the desired object is shown just press Enter Note A SCATT file may have a different extension according to the lan guage selection SCATT UK SCATT NO SCATT FR etc Load scatter object by CR Object Length Height Btm hgt MD8 tail 4 20m 6 280m 3 18m More objects can be added to the SCATT GB file Fig SCA207 Display for the loading th
157. ero sati OF feet Pud Dirt i di 67 te Grmrral B gt Sd A te Grmrral ER amp lt P Issert phare ztmh is GH amp lt Pi Issert phares ztmh is SE amp Alt P4 Henmzer rtuwh amp lr P amp Gamrel eptinized f te default amp lr i z 5 Tepsle astosss 1 3 OmcDff amp lt h foyyle amplitudes dH or x lt Teggslae Closrawce TE Oncoff amp lt D Eegygzle betwoom din pi amp lt E Ectesded Frog S 4H Gh Alt P Prag ispat sem GP er L Alt L Leck lewer screen data Teggle messeres meters fant Blt lepar PEL 4 LS im er x amp lt X Ghezrz the AGE alarm limite 1 F Get gremm Er amd Cosdect amp lt Z Get HF masmimal vale MaNGO OEL Heruay email mamcer lobes lien ms Fig CPN501 Screen after hotkey H is pressed Info on Version amp Date Hot key lt l gt shows the program version and date This info replaces the head ing text of the Control Panel lt N gt News in Development Hot key N display the A330 NEw file which briefly describe the AXIS 330 development phases Q gt Quit from Control Panel Hot key Q can be used instead of F10 to exit AXIS 330 20 OCT 1995 CPN 27 AXIS 330 User s Manual Z See startup arguments Hot key Z displays the switches arguments to be selected at startup Bate AXIS 338 ILE GLIBEFRTH SIRULATOE 8 H BRRO Time gt Syitokea For otartup AHIS coftware oer Guide Bao complete Liat Freossd only Firot owitob with 6 H Hp Feet por
158. errain Top optimizing by F5 4 Enter the optimizing point FWD distance 1000m SDW distance 60m Height Above GP zero 10m After last entry the software will return to the Control Panel and the optimization result is shown The amplitude ratio RT is changed 52 6 and the phase PHX to 185 3 The feeds are now already set to these values as can be seen on the Control Panel AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 UTL 19 AXIS 330 User s Manual lt Bate gt AXIS 338 ILS GLIDEPATH SIMULATOR S W BEP lt Tine gt Control Panel Optinizing example Ko lt F92 1 dat 2 for Element X ORS 1 60 1 Optimize NATHREIN 2L 1 Fig UTL509 The Control Panel shows the optimized setting The resulting approach on the GP will now give a very straight structure with very little bends fpproach El 3 88 Az B B Sdu 122 FLY UP Ce EX SBvad s 1B5kts fchiewed GP DATUN Actual GP BATUM 2 98 15 55 3 B8 15 158 FLIBAW CFZoImwert F3OFrist F4 Saee FBOScatter C Ualues Fig UTL510 The bends after optimizing The signals in the immediate sectors above and below the GP angle will not be affected by this optimization Depending on the lateral offset the window diagram might be tilted sideways but normally within acceptable limits Run the Window mode to check it AXIS 330 NANCO UTL 20 20 AUG 1994 Software AXIS 330 User s Manual SCA ocattering Object Editor
159. et 122m Track azimuth 90 089 d B gt or z C at Limit Start Distance 23672m 12 8NM gt Display End Distance 4336m X E rase Increment Step 266m G raph dir Receiver speed 185kts CIDncr x Receiver filter 2 8 rad s 2 Scale Origin Xsc CPoarameter qu cale center Bp S ense Mui rFull scale t 466A T gt racking ER Description CNDormalized Fig APP301 Numeric data entries in case of the theodolite tracking 3 1 Theodolite position 3 1 3 1 The ideal position for a theodolite would be at the foot of the GP mast As the practical theodolite can not be positioned in the ideal position the impact of the position error must be calculated Information about the theodolite positioning error is given in chapter 8 Note The theodolite position data input is requested only when tracking toggle is selected as a theodolite 1 Theodolite forward position Theodolite FWD position m lt O gt The theodolite FWD position is the longitudinal distance from the GP zero point Positive values are in front of the GP antennas 2 Theodolite sideways position Theodolite SDW position m lt O gt lt Twds RWY gt Theo Sdw is the sideways displacement compared to the GP zero point Nega tive distances are towards the runway regardless left or right hand side APP 4 AXIS 330 NANCO 20 SEP 2006 Software Approach Mode 3 1 3 Theodolite height Theodolite HGT above GP zero m 0 The theo
160. evation angle Vertical angle of the approach path Level feet SDW Offset Track azimuth Theo Fwd Sdw Hgt Theo upwards tilt Start Distance End Distance Flying level in feet Note This will show instead of the elevation angle when level run is selected Sideways offset of the track Horizontal angle of the approach path seen from the array The theodolite position relative to the GP zero point at the foot of the antenna mast Note This is displayed only when theodolite guided ap proach is selected Mechanical tilt of the theodolite vertical pilot axis Note This option will appear only when AXIS 330 is start ed with THEO switch The start point of the approach from the GP mast The end point of the approach from the GP mast AXIS 330 APP 2 NANCO 20 SEP 2006 Software Approach Mode Increment step The step distance along the approach Receiver speed The speed of the receiver for low pass filtering Scale Center The offset of the center axis of the graph Full Scale The graph full scale deflection Description The text added into the graph 2 2 Toggle Panel 2 The toggles are used to make some quick selections The toggle panel includes the following toggles d B or 96 Select amplitude scale in dB or per cent C at Limit Select the CAT I II or III limits to be drawn in the graph Display Selection between graph and table E rase Select between new and old computed curve G raph dir The approach directi
161. f lt CR to exit FhOTop CF Ground F5 F6 iC fos Fig BND303 Data Entry Selection in Make Bend Option 3 3 1 F5 Top Forward Distance The forward distance is the longitudinal distance between the GP mast and the midpoint of the object measured along the centerline Note If the entered distance is zero the entry is cancelled Psruard Dirtamcz Prem GP Fig BND304 Display for entering the forward distance of the object AXIS 330 NANCO BND 6 20 AUG 1994 ues Bend Analysis Mode Sideways Distance The sideways distance is the lateral distance between the GP centerline and midpoint of the object Use negative values towards runway regardless if it is to the right hand or left hand side of the GP antenna Bddewage Biztancm from GF CL Fig BND305 Display for entering the sideways distance of the object Height Above GP zero The height of the scattering object above GP zero can be entered in meters or vertical angles Use lt F2 gt to toggle between the meter and the angle entry mode Height Aboue GF Zaro F23 Hng Fig BND306 Display for entering the height above GP zero AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 3 2 F6 Ground Forward Distance from GP The forward distance is the longitudinal distance between the midpoint of the ground edge and the GP mast measured along the GP centerline Note Ifthe entered dista
162. f the runway and the antenna element type 3 The figure shows the runway and the GP system seen from the ground towards the landing aircraft Another data field in this group is the type of antenna ele ment Mechanical settings of each antenna 4 The data of the mechanical settings for each antenna are height offset forward shift and azimuth turn RF feeds for each antenna 5 This data group allows to adjust the CSB and SBO signals for each antenna element In addition antenna gain 100 and phase 0 can be adjusted AXIS 330 NANCO P 20 AUG 2002 CPN 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual CL monitor position 6 This data group shows the optimum coordinates of the near field Course Line monitor in relation to the GP mast Only adjustable parameter is the sideways distance All other parameters Distance and Height will be calculated and dis played automatically Transmitter data 7 The transmitter data group contain the CSB modulation balance BAL and the modulation sum SDM adjustment possibility as well as the SBO amplitude and phase settings Threshold data 8 The threshold data group have the following THR data Thr dist the longitudinal distance from GP mast to THR Note This field will be calculated automatically Thr hgt the height of the actual RWY centerline surface at THR referred to GP zero at the antenna mast Note This data field will be calculated automatically Xing hgt the height of the
163. formation about the filter is given in appendix A1 chapter 5 AXIS 330 NANCO SET 4 20 OCT 2005 Software SetUp 3 2 4 Character Set Prt Chrs There are two character sets available for the printer Normally the international ASCII code is used but most laser printer use the Roman 8 character set To decide this look at the printout with international ASCII 1 ASCII set select ed If the heading underline is a series of a characters and the degree symbol becomes a 3 you should change the character set to Roman 8 to correct the printout 3 3 Other settings The default setup will save some other settings that are shown in the Data Panel but cannot be set in this Panel 1 CDI DDM selection 2 Meter Feet selection 3 Language selection 4 Renaming the Work and Graph directories Ie j B aRBn C ECE Lanquage CH CRG FR i k J m H BY fP H i i FOF Ana HE E H Cn Heres Ie Fun T e agi FP ime i AY RIGHT ikFurm Fe hi EU Slop 1 iHi HELA Amp A E T F EL t FELRE Gn 43 6 ren 1 Ew E P h H jFRef l ROLET EARTH pe imi HATHRETIH F f I k P am Wark directory WHEE Graph directory FHV Thi the stun art ing ar pre ing i Fig SET303 Information of the other default settings 3 3 1 CDI DDM Selection The CDI DDM selection was set in the Control Panel If the system has CDI as default and DDM is wanted follow these steps 1 Toggle from CDI to DDM by lt Alt D gt on the Control Panel
164. g the lt PgUp gt or lt PgDn gt keys invert the screen by the F2 key for screen capture etc quit the playback show by the lt F10 gt key Any other key will continue the show Merticel Trace Fud i 160095 Su 127a CDI pA A 11580645 CSA DERA 75pADP 1 158p5 Sep 6 461 2 266 2 699 1 000 3 3514 1 725 Fadn 6 461 ETS Pepisteg Her Palnisten Ahead F2hInurrt CF Le eet Fig PLY301 The screen with help row at the bottom when the slide show is stopped AXIS 330 NANCO PLY 6 20 AUG 1994 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS 330 User s Manual LAT Lateral Trace Mode Table of Content TUDSSCrIptIOR ES RASE Attias REARS Bee SOs En etl Sie calles thie 2 Data Screen eese 2 1 Table of Numeric data 1 2 2 Toggle panel 2 2 3 Command row 3 3 The Data entry 3 1 The range to circle neo ee os Rennes 3 2 Sideways Distance uns 3 3 El angle 3 4 Start angle 3 5 Stop angle 3 6 Angle step 3 7 Graphic Centerline 3 8 Description text 4 Toggles 4 1 A mplitude D isplay tI M NC md erret den ete PED Ree POI diede P arameter S ense i i i AST M ltiple 2 2 no rec rt Ree Pere deed b Cotmmaliids oed RR EG MERE MER CP 5 1 F2 Change 5 2 F3 Text 5 3 F4 FSD
165. gs sssseeee 5 7 Cancel pr AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 NOV 1994 SET i AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO SET ii 20 NOV 1994 Software SetUp 1 Description The SetUp utility is called from the Control Panel by F3 key The SetUp utility consists of three main functions 1 default setup 2 language selection 3 the user code deletion The settings of the default setup is always used whenever the AXIS 330 is start ed Language selection is used to determine the language that is seen in help screens and names of parameters toggles all around the AXIS 330 The user code deletion is used for security purposes and for re entering a new User Code with different access level SetUp procedure is divided into two parts actually two screens In the first screen Data Panel is used to set parameters After Data Panel settings you will proceed to the second screen Command Panel where you have five commands available Language Save Rename Directories Delete user code and No Change AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 NOV 1994 SET 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Panel The F3 in the Control Panel will start the setup procedure by opening the first screen called Data Panel Data Panel configuration items are divided into three groups 1 Site Data Extra Signals GPside and Ant type 2 Printer Screen RX Filter and Character Settings 3 Colour settin
166. gs 4 Other settings cannot be set in this panel CDI DDM Meter Feet Language The Work and Graph directories GP T HARARY CECE FRQ MHz 113 8 199 9 GF Angle Elament Ty RHA THHEIM BL Hork Aircatory HIRE Graph directo EH Ou tnxt Background rt rs to rtandard Fig SET201 The Data Panel of the SetUp AXIS 330 NANCO Software SET 2 20 NOV 1994 AXIS 330 NANCO Software SetUp 3 Data Entry The small triangles in front of the items indicate that the item may be changed by moving the cursor with the arrow keys to the desired data field and then using the value stepping keys The value stepping keys are Increment Decrement Factor Insert Delete 0 1 lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt 1 lt ctrl PgUp gt lt ctrl PgDn gt 10 3 1 Site Data Extra Signals GPside and Ant type The Site Data Extra Signals GPside and Ant type are exactly the same as the in the Control Panel See details section CPN chapter 3 1 3 3 FCLH CE ptimixem Fig SET301 Site Data Extra Signals GPside and Antenna type settings 3 2 Printer Screen RX Filter and Character Settings This data group is consisting four settings as follows 1 Form Feed for the Printer 2 Screen Type 3 Receiver Filter and 4 Character Set Note These settings can be only made in the SetUp Data Panel Lang uiam GH CH F LiF CE eters Ww A l CHT Form Feed HO ir ite 644 488 lensnt Typa PFA F
167. he Window plane SDW offset Sideways distance to the Window center 2 2 Toggle panel 2 The toggles includes the settings for the output form of the computation A mpl range Selection for the amplitude resolution D efinition Selection for the graphic resolution E rase Erasing an earlier computed Window Data P arameter Selection for the displayed parameter S een from Selection from where the window is seen W nd 3D Three dimensional graph is enabled after graph run 2 3 Command row 3 The commands include utilities for data entry and software control F2 Change Activate the numeric data entry F3 Text Entry for the text line to be shown on the graph F10 Menu Return to main menu CR Continue Starts the Window computation AXIS 330 NANCO WN D 2 20 OCT 1997 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software Window Overview Mode 3 The Data entry The numeric data are entered by the F2 command allowing to change one or more items The present value is always shown between angle brackets Enter new value from the keyboard or press Enter to keep the present value Pun Distaepe Um X inan FIN ef Poet Cw X E Fig WND301 Data Entries in window overview 3 1 Forward Distance FWD Distance m lt 10000 gt The FWD Distance represents the longitudinal distance from the GP mast to the location of the Window plane The default value is 10000m 3 2 Sideways Offset SDW Offset m lt 122 gt
168. heodolite forward position sssseseeeeeeeess 4 3 1 2 Theodolite sideways position 4 3 1 3 Theodoltte height 5 iecore rent nnne 5 3 1 4 Theodolite upward tilt angle 0 cece cece cette eee eteeeeteeeeeeeeeees 5 3 2 Elevation Angle C 5 360 LOVE UN ab ia ene te nee AE tn 5 3 4 Sideways offset T 5 3 9 racek AZIMU uos dence o ate rA a in et Unc C alee 5 3 6 Start distance Lanterne dr 5 Oey ENG DISIANCG iat a Re ns A E te 6 3 8 Increment Step ER 6 3 9 Receiver Speed a coe oo tho ta ra cu ea euet ues 6 3 10 Receiver Filter en dau nes eie nectit 6 3 11 Graph Centerline ndn idet mte eth rer ut ali 6 3 12 Description text scenes iere cater cred nn IP eben Nan rein ont 6 A STOOQIGS b P I ECCE 7 ZO NCOSEEIDIE S eene tob ete bett tobedactesiois 7 2D ISN iE 7 HO EN ASS NTC E aE nE iE 7 4 4 Graph ER 7 TES MNR bloc a er eee ee renee ere ee eee c tL 7 AOX SCAG srr 5 a pr cedi DE a T ee ca cee 7 CETA 3 d 6 p IRR RON ET E E E I Te ee 7 4 8 P aramelols x ode escort uen eda bro Re SM ee ne 7 4 9 SENSE MMC 8 A VOM VEC IMC 2 e a E a E eek 8 D COMMANASE Re A E E E eee ee 9 Dil F2 Sig n EE A E S 9 X2 FOTEX o due eee ee ns uv du rs 9 5 9 FAVES D rna nia A T nf ot id 9 S H E SD o MM E E 9 Dep Uh TOMEN nA a a hoa A a peste ved 9 AXIS 330 NANCO eons 20 SEP 2006 APP i AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 6 CONNUS SOR ooo one Sour on teg doo AC ae Cres 9 6 Table dISpIA s 55 Landes o
169. hown An interesting feature of the graphs is showing bend patterns from a scattering object in the lateral direction This shows that bends occur in all directions also in the lateral direction When flying down a rough glide path along the localiser course line deviations of the aircrafts path from the localiser will often cause the glide path recording to look different from a track made exactly along the localiser course line This is one of the reasons why it is very difficult to get repetitive runs look simi lar The more exact the aircraft can be flown the more similar the curves will be This effect can not be compensated by the theodolite differential compensation as the bend patterns are different in all directions in the space AXIS 330 NANCO LAT 10 20 OCT 1995 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software Lateral Trace Mode 7 2 Functions The functions of the graphic display are F1 B amp W Black amp White to Colour Selector F2 Invert Display invert the colours for cut amp paste purposes F3 Print Print the curve to a printer F4 Save Save a B amp W graph for later play back lt Values gt Curve Tracer 7 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector F1 B amp W This function is used to toggle the graph between colour and black amp white The lt F1 gt key will turn the graph into black background and white lines Repeat ing the F1 key will restore the colour display 7 2 2 F2 Display Inverter
170. ilter 5 0 res FEATHREIM ch KPrt Chro I AS8CII ELH Ampl FCLH CBI 1 Gti L CE Fig SET302 Printer Screen RX filter and Character Settings 20 NOV 1994 SET 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 2 1 Form Feed for Printer Form Feed Form Feed selection has two state NO and YES indicating if the Form Feed Character is sent to the printer after each page If graflasr printer driver is used in the GP BAT file a Form Feed will automatically be sent and this field should be set to NO otherwise a blank page will be printed out 3 2 2 Screen Type The following screen type choices are available SCREEN TYPE 0 This type does not allow the graph display TEXT MODE WARNING Fatal error will be a result when a graph diagram is started SCREEN TYPE 12 16 colours graphic mode VGA 640x480 3 2 3 Receiver Filter RX Filter The receiver plotter has a certain time constant that determine the upper frequen Cy limitfor outputting fast scalloping The frequency where amplitude of the bends has decreased 3dB is called the cutoff frequency This will be expressed in radians per second rad s The AXIS 330 simulates a digital low pass filter and the value of the cutoff fre quency will be effected to the bend amplitudes In static run modes like Fixed Point and Ground Current where the receiver speed is zero the filter value has no effect ICAO Annex 10 attachment C recommends a time constant depending on the speed More in
171. in graph 1 Projection level keys 2 Y offset adjustment 0 0 keys 3 Minimum distance 0 0 keys 4 Maximum distance PgUp lt PgDn gt keys When pressing any positioning key the program execution goes to the adjust AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 AXIS 330 User s Manual ment mode and in the middle of the upper part of the graph there will appear the warning text Position is adjusted Press CR to ReDraw gt 5 2 1 Projection Level Lot 1 We can change the projection level of the hyperbolic lines so they are drawn on an imaginary horizontal plane at a selected height above the surrounding ground level We are normally selecting a level that corresponds to the center of the reflection objects that can be found in the given area Using the or key will alter the projection level in 1m steps while in the graphic Screen to ease the cut and try procedure of determining the location of a scatter ing object Bocunsestat ioe Bead Malysia Track AZ 0 0 Proj lew 10m Fig BND502 The graph screen when projection level is adjusted 5 2 2 Y shift O0 The lt Up Dn gt arrow keys are used to move the center of the graph up or down in 10m steps The value of the parameter is stepped by Up Dn arrow keys and the text field shows the value until you press lt enter gt for redraw or use another position key Bocurewtat ioe Bend Analysis Track AZ 0 0
172. ion The scattering objects simulates adverse environment like limited reflection plane high hills buildings and metal constructions that will most likely cause bends on the glidepath signals due to reflections or diffractions of the GP signals into the approach sector The scattering object editor is invoked by the F8 key enabling to insert view or modify the simulated scattering objects Additionally it allows to optimize the antenna feeds according to the selected scattering object There are five types of the scattering objects available in the AXIS 330 1 walls of buildings and aircraft tailfins Sheet 2 power and telephone lines Wire 3 earth walls Ridge 4 hills Top 5 discontinuity of the reflection plane Ground The AXIS 330 can handle upto sixteen simultaneous objects If there are already objects entered in the system the scattering object editor will show a list of the present objects allowing to see and to modify any of these If there are no objects in the system the editor will proceed automatical ly to the object data entry point AXIS 330 NANCO Sowas 20 JAN 2005 SCA 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Entry There are different amount of parameters for each scattering object During data entry each parameter will be displayed with a simple drawing as a guide The default value of the parameter is shown inside angle brackets To keep this value just press Enter otherwise enter a
173. isplaced side by side in a broadside array When moving sideways in azimuth AZ the received phase errors 40 will be 40 0 0000 O 0 LOsin AZ formula WND 1 The Deviation value CDI at a given position follows a cosine function to the SBO CSB phase relationship CDI DDM 150 0 175 coss formula WND 2 WND 12 20 AUG 1994 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Window Overview Mode If the nominal CDI without phase error is CDI the CDI will be reduced to CDI CDI cos formula WND 3 Substituting 40 in formula WND 3 with formula WND 1 we will get the deteriorated CDI value for Null Reference CDI CDI cos 360 0 4 sin AZ formula WND 4 The phase error will be symmetrical with opposite sign to each side of the GP centerline directly in front of the antennas at very long distances The cos 441 function is symmetrical and has positive values when 90 4l lt 90 The ISO CDI lines will therefore be symmetrical to each side of the GP center line If there is any phase error 4M in the nominal SBO CSB radiation this will add to the I caused by the offset and make the ISO CDI lines unsymmetri cal In this case the ISO CDI lines in the upper and lower section will have their normal elevation angular value at an azimuth when 440 cancels 41 This azimuth angle will be AZ sin Also 360 44 formula WND 5 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 WND 13 AXIS 330 User s Manual
174. ist with a brief description of the commonly used definitions and abbreviations AXA Questions and Answers The most commonly asked questions about AXIS 330 4 3 How to use this manual The AXIS 330 includes a lot of features divided into several modules Due to the organization of this manual it is not necessary to read throughout the manual so you may ignore the sections you are not interested in In any way the usage of the AXIS 330 is based on the site and GP system pa rameters that is necessary to enter before making any simulation These parameters are entered in the Control Panel CPN so it is most important to have a good understand of all parameters and functions available in the Con trol Panel If you are fairly new with the AXIS 330 we recommend to read through the Con trol Panel section CPN before going to the run modes AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JUN 2005 GEN 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 4 Language All terms and abbreviations of this manual are following the English language If any other language is used the terms will be changed according to the selected language So if you like to follow the instructions of this manual while you are running the AXIS 330 please select the English language by F3 SetUp in the Control Panel 4 5 Typefaces The different typefaces in this manual are used as follows Bold Courier A text is displayed on the screen examples SBO Ampl FWD Dist m Italics I
175. istance Div Division AXIS330 NANCO AX3 2 20 AUG 1994 Software Appendix 3 EImt Extra signals FRQ FSD FSL FWD FIX GEN GND GP GP centerline GP Zero GRAPH Hgt Hyper ILS ILS Point A ILS Point B ILS Point C ILS Point D ILS Point E ILS Point T ICAO Incr IRD ISO CDI Antenna Element Frequency Full Scale Deflection Forward Slope Forward Fixed Position mode section of this manual General Section of this manual Ground Current mode section of this manual Glide P ath Graphic result of the analysis Height Hyperbolic path Instrument Landing System A point on the extended runway centerline a distance of 7 5 km ANM from the threshold A point on the extended runway centerline a distance of 1050m 3500ft from the threshold A point on the extended centerline where the nominal ILS glide path passes at a height of 30m 100ft A point 4m 12ft above the runway centerline and 900m 3000ft from the threshold in the direction of the localizer A point 4m 12ft above the runway centerline and 600m 2000ft from the stop end of the runway in the direction of the threshold A point normally 15m above the threshold where the downward extended straight portion of the ILS glide path passes Called also ILS reference Datum International Civil Aviation Organisation Increment ILS Reference Datum See ILS Point T Constant Deviation line Used in window overview graph ic
176. lack amp white mode using F1 and F2 keys before print ing 7 2 4 F4 Graph Saver F4 Save Note This function is enabled and displayed only when the screen is se lected as black amp white The Graph Saver is used to save the graphic screen to the disk on a selected SHOW directory The names of the files will be generated automatically and the first save is named as AXGO BAS second AXG1 BAS third AXG2 BAS and so on Before saving go to the Playback menu item on the Main Menu and select the wanted directory by the PgUp PgDn keys See the PLY section The saving format is the basic language BSAVE BLOAD mode enabling the fastest Load and play back in the AXIS 330 AXIS 330 NANCO Software VRT 12 20 AUG 1994 i Vertical Trace Mode 7 2 5 F8 Scattering Object Editor F8 Scatter Note This function is enabled and displayed only when at least one scat tering object is entered This function starts the scattering object editor in a same way as in Control Panel allowing to modify scattering objects The detailed description is given in SCA section 7 2 6 Alt F8 Offset all Scattering Sheets together non visible Offset the positions of all sheets in X fwd Y sdw and Z hgt coordinates to gether This is useful when moving a complex object that is built up of several sheets AXIS 330 NANCO ser 20 AUG 1994 VRT 13 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 2 7 Curve Tracer Values gt Note This functio
177. le ees Haber f pees Cd amp fay iF PUD ist at imm FIN Distant mt x LEE PUD Dis tpn mt immnn jana FIN Disia at LEE 8 PUD Dis tpn mt innar zd FIN Distant my x ur c Fig VRT302 Data entry for multiple run AXIS 330 NANCO VRT 4 20 OCT 1995 es Vertical Trace Mode 3 2 Sideways Distance SDW Distance 122 Sideways distance represents the lateral distance from the GP centerline to the trace Note The negative sign means the distance is measured towards the run way from the GP antenna The positive value shows the distance away from the runway 3 3 Minimum Angle MIN Angle lt 0 10 The Minimum Angle is the start angle of the trace measured from the GP zero point in degrees 3 4 Maximum Angle MAX Angle 9 5 90 The Maximum Angle is the stop angle of the trace measured from the GP zero point in degrees 3 5 Increment Increment Step lt 0 10 The Increment Step is a angle increment to be used in the calculations Note Also the lt l gt key in the toggle panel can be used to shorten the incre ment 1 2 or even 1 4 The toggle lt l gt does not effect to this setting but only the calculation 3 6 Graphic Centerline Graph Scale Centerline uA lt O gt The center axis of the graph might be offset to the average deviation value at the approach azimuth angle in order to increase the resolution Note The graph full scale deflection FS
178. lide show LAT Lateral Trace mode A module for simulating an orbit flight cross over in the azimuth plane VRT Vertical Trace mode A module for simulating CDI and amplitudes along a vertical line above given coordinates in the terrain WND WindowOverview A module for displaying the ISO Deviation lines from 300uA FLY UP to 225uA FLY DOWN in the coverage sectors of the GP system APP Approach mode A module for simulating an approach path at either constant level ideal hyperbolic line of constant zero deviation or tracked by a theodo lite located at user determined coordinates GEN 4 20 JUN 2005 General FIX Fixed Position mode A module for simulating the resulting deviation and amplitudes in one or two positions while a selected feed parameter is varied between chosen limits GND Ground Current mode A module for visualising the ground currents induced on the reflection plane BND Bend Analysis mode A module for finding the source of reflections that produce bends on the GP signal SNS Sensitive Area mode A module for defining the sensitive area of the airport where a given moving object will cause bends on the GP signals Appendices AX1 Glide Path Model The background information of the simulation model to be used in the AXIS 330 AX Files and Directories Description of the directories structure and the content of the data files to be used in the AXIS 330 AX3 Definitions and Abbreviations A l
179. line to give the final weighted Forward Slope AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 UTL 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 1 RPL Command Screen When the RPL slope computation is selected by F3 in the utility selection panel the RPL computation routine will start and the first screen is called the Command Screen consisting of four commands 1 F2 Loadfile 2 F3 Compute New 3 F4 Continue and 4 CR Quit lt F ilosd File F3 Computo Mew F43Continue 4CEMQuIt Fig UTL402 RPL slope computation command screen 4 1 1 Load File F2 The Load file command is activated by F2 and is used to load earlier saved reflection plane terrain measurements The screen shows all RPL files and the user is asked to enter the filename with out extension which is always RPL Note If Enter is pressed with no name the AXIS 330 uses the first RPL files that is shown on the screen Pata ARTS J36 B26 Reflection Flane Unit ELECE Enter Filename without Extenolon BFLO ZIF EFL Bo EPL HVE EFL TESTI EFL J bi6bi1S Estou Free Fig UTL403 Load File Screen Secondly the user is asked to enter the weight distance baseline The point where the average calculation is changed weighted one The default value de pends on the GP angle and the FSL Weight distance m m lt 180 gt After entering another distance or just pressing Enter to keep the default value the software will open the RPL Result Panel 4
180. lope FSL 3 1 5 Sideways Slope SSL 3 1 6 Runway Distance sssssssssseseeeeeeneeneenenenenn 3 1 7 Reflection Plane 3 2 Extra signals 3 2 1 General ratio RT 3 2 2 CSB ratio RTO tree nent Nestes 9 2 8 SBOFratlo RES co p er ee eee 3 2 4 Phase of extra signals PHX 3 2 5 Clearance Amplitude CLRA 3 2 6 Clearance Deviation CLRD 3 2 7 Optimize 3 3 GP Side and Antenna Type 3 3 1 GP Side 33 2 Anteriria Type tr rennes ding be ence 3 4 Antenna mechanical setting 3 4 1 Antenna height 3 4 2 Lateral offset sssssssssssssseseeeeeeeee nennt 3 4 3 Forward shift 5 2 cientes diet Sas ems 3 4 4 Azimuth turn 3 5 Antenna Element Feeds 3 5 1 Amplitude errors 3 5 2 Phase errors 3 5 3 CSB amplitudes 3 5 4 GSB phases ere eU enn tenseur 3 5 5 SBO amplitudes sseneeeeees 3 5 6 SBO phases 3 6 The Near Field Monitor reading 3 6 1 Distance eiecit neret opaan rinan reao reer es 9 6 2 Heighb cbe EORUM 20 AUG 2002 CPN i AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 Function Keys 4 1 F1 Help 4 2 F2 DOS LES SelUp i o sou hUREUHUMD OGEONBERRENUM BAVA Util ierit re Ee deeper tiet ean 4 5 F5 New 4 6 F6 Last 4 7 F7 File 3 6 3 Sideways Distance 3 7 Transmitter
181. lows 1 F2 Graph Showing the computing result as a graph 2 F3 Save Saving data to the disk 3 F4 FSL Loading FSL into the simulation model 4 F5 List Data Redisplay the RPL Result Panel 5 lt CR gt Quit Returning to the RPL Command Screen 4 3 1 F2 Graphic F2 Graph The F2 key will open the graphic screen with the RPL slope calculation re sults The graph can be inverted by the F2 key and printout by the F3 key AXIS 330 NANCO UTL 1 2 Software 20 AUG 1994 Utilities RPL slope calculation Eeflection plose profile Weight dist 158m fm B Bie F3L H B51 GF zero height Blize 388 Bie CF2 lesert CEJYFEIWinu t Fig UTL407 The typical graphic presentation of the RPL slope computa tion The average forward slope is computed to 0 051 and the average plane hits the GP mast 0 142m above the foot This is the GP zero height where all antenna heights shall be measured from In addition should the penetration depth be subtracted It is found in the Control Panel See section CPN 4 3 2 F3 Save F3 Save results The entered points will be saved on the disk as a RPL file 4 3 3 F4 FSL F4 FSL 0 051 The calculated final FSL can be loaded by the F4 key to the simulation model and the program jumps back to the Control Panel AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 UTL 13 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 3 4 F5 List data F5 List data This function redisplays the c
182. ltered range or runway distance labels Note If the memory contains the last result the data entry for scan area and rx position are disabled 4 4 O rientation YES displays the worst case sheet orientation along the border of the sensitive area NO displays the border of the sensitive area as a continuous line Note This toggle cannot be activated unless the Worst Case toggle has been set AXIS 330 NANCO SNS 12 20 AUG 2002 Software Sensitive Area Mode 4 5 S catter A ready made set of scattering sheet sizes for some aircraft tails like MD80 B737 B747 and B767 plus a number of other objects The file SCATT GB contains these objects The user may add with a text editor any number of new objects to this file by following the rows and columns used for the present ones For other sizes this toggle must be set to FREE option and use F8 to enter the scattering object 4 6 W orst Case This toggle is used to set the sheet rotation step for testing through a number of horizontal orientations rotation to produce the largest bend amplitude for a current scattering sheet location The increment options are 45 30 10 5 2 and NO Repeat pressing the W key to set the rotation increment 4 7 Y axis scan FULL scan will force the scatter sheet to be moved sideways out to the ScanWidth for every forward step FAST scan will scan outwards only until the first occurrence of the Bend Limit has been reached
183. m go go 1 08 2 WD 566m 166m 1880 8m 6 616m 16 6m 6 5 wire 1 808 3 CR 766m 166m 1880 8m 3 8m 5 0m 9809 6 16 4 TD 800m 1 m 38 8m 38 80m 6 24 5 CG 988m m 8 8m i889 1 66 CF2 gt Add lt F3 Delete F4 gt Remove all F5 gt Sort lt F6 List F gt Optimize lt CR gt CtrlPan Fig SCA304 The screen after entered x 1m y 2m and z 3m Note lt Alt F8 gt can be used directly from the Graph Command keys so one may offset sheets directly after computed a graph 3 2 9 CR CTRL Panel Pressing the Enter key it will terminate the editor and the AXIS 330 will return to the location where it was activated AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 20 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 4 Modeling a tailfin In order to model a tailfin a tapered one into a rectangular plate a few things should be concidered The incoming signal strength increases along the height of the tailfin due to the lobing of the horizontal polarized ILS signal The scattered field at the upper part of the tailfin will yield lower lobes than the rest of the fin radiating a stronger field in low elevation angles This creates a double effect where the received scattered field at low angles will increase with the tailfin height in the power of between 2 and 3 Itis therefore more important to emulate the upper part of the tailfin than the lower part The plate model sheet should theerfor
184. me is DATA XL Type a new name or just press Enter to keep the default name The name must be according to the DOS specification other wise it will be truncated name 8 letters and extension 3 letters After the file name is entered this command will be shown as a filename between angle brackets To disable this function press F6 again and the original com mand text F6 Excel is displayed 5 5 F10 Menu Function key F10 returns the program execution into the main menu 5 6 Continue CR Starts the lateral trace mode run AXIS 330 NANCO LAT 8 20 AUG 1994 Software Lateral Trace Mode 6 Table display If the D isplay toggle is selected as a TABL the computed results will be shown as a list of the parameter values This will also enable an Excel reada ble file to be saved on the disk if the F6 command key is pressed Before the execution of the list it is asked if the user wants to take the results to the printer Hardcopy of Results y or SPACE Enter Y or another letter if the language is not English for printing out The display will stop while the screen is full and the user is asked to hit any key to continue That will be repeated as long as the all computed results are shown The list includes the following parameters x Aximuth angle from the GP zero in degrees CDI Course deviation in uA or DDM CSB Course CSB amplitude SBO Course SBO amplitude Phase Course Phase
185. metrical origin As the theodolite can not normally be posi tioned in the ideal mast foot position a good practical position is found else where 8 1 Error compensation To minimize the error the theodolite should be positioned where the GP angle goes through the theodolite eye GP most Fig APP801 Minimum error theodolite position This position has the disadvantage of taking too much azimuth movement to track the aircraft down to the threshold A better position is to locate the theodo lite closer to the runway and slightly behind the GP antenna mast Fig APP802 Position for enable tracking beyond the threshold In this position the GP system and theodolite will not agree upon the GP angle and an error compensation curve will show a difference This should be identical to practical results AXIS 330 ONANCO Software 20 OCT 1 997 AP P 1 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual CDI Approach El 3 00 Az 20 0 Sdw 1Z2m Theo F 5m S 60m H 1 20m XIS 330 FSD 50pA Ctr Op PE Be DOUN Cent dott tie Oe eto fete de Re A M MAR CM RX 5 0rad s 105ktz Achieved GP DATUM Actual GP DATUM 98 15 61m 3 800 15 20m CF1 B8U FZ Invert F3 0Print Fd Sau amp amp Ualues Fig APP803 Theodolite error tracking curve for a normally operating GP system 8 2 Error by sloping reflection plane If a reflection plane has a forward and or sideways tilt angle the vertical angles seen from
186. n ter The screen will show the number of the selected mode 6 The data screen of the selected mode is opened with default data values If any data value should be changed press the F2 to re enter and continue to answer all questions in two ways Press enter if the shown value default value is accepted Enter value from keyboard if another value is desired and press lt enter gt 7 Ifawrong entry was made or if the wrong menu item was selected just press the lt F10 gt to start over again 8 Set Toggles by the first letter of the toggle to get the desired comput ing parameters and the display settings 9 Press lt enter gt to perform the computation 10 Afterthe graphic has been drawn press the keys shown at the bottom of the screen for special functions For example press the F3 to print out a graphic diagram 11 To break a graphic computation or exit the module you are in or quit the program use the lt F10 gt AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JUN 2005 GEN 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 Updates 6 1 6 2 Earlier releases The AXIS 330 comes in updated releases Rnn where nn is the release number When new versions of the software are issued the new files should be updated Note The user edited files like GP BAT GRAFPLUS etc will not be over written When receiving an update diskette just copy the content into the AXIS directory If another language than English is used
187. n wet etc AXIS 330 NANCO AX1 4 20 AUG 1999 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software Appendix 1 Glide Path Model 4 Adverse environment model Adverse terrain like limited reflection plane high hills buildings and metal constructions will often cause bends on the glide path signals due to reflections and diffraction of the GP signals into the approach sector The AXIS 330 can simulate five types of scattering objects 1 TheRectangular S heet S type 2 The W ire Section W type 3 The Semispheric Hill T op T type 4 The R idges or earth walls R type 5 The Truncated G round Plane G type 4 1 The Rectangular Sheet The S type scattering modelis used to simulate vertical conducting sheets the walls of buildings facing the glide path antennas and the runway Back walls in the shadow ofthe directglide path signal ARE NOT simulated Also aircraft tailfin or any metallic construction can be simulated by using rectan gularsheets positioned and oriented in the three dimensional space S cattering calculation is divided into reflections and diffractions Diffracted signal Scattering sheet GP Reflected signal Fig AX1 401 The scattering sheet 4 1 1 Reflection The maximum reflection occurs mainly in the optical specular angle A number of sidelobes occur similar to the function k sin x x where k and x depend on the length and height of the sheet The re reflection from ground between the shee
188. n is disabled in 3D graphic This function is used to show the exact value along the curves The point on the curve is shown with small square called cursor and can be moved by using the Left or Right arrow keys Pressing the arrow key the cursor will move along the curve while the value of the selected parameter and the distance will be displayed in the upper left hand part of the graphic screen With Left and Right arrows the cursor is moving with one computed step increment selected in data panel while holding the Ctrl key the steps will be 10 times larger Syctes for Joseni Vertical Trace Fad iia 54 iffa COL ip 2 00 31 2718 FSD xen pa Cip psp FLY Did i r Lise 755b Ar d 25p4 150p Tp td 351 z 255 2 609 3 000 3 361 3 235 Fini ghi LFB CFS nuert F3 Print P amp khaus dP kScatter lt a leur Fig VRT703 Angle and parameter reading of the cursor location AXIS 330 NANCO VRT 14 20 AUG 1994 Software AXIS 330 User s Manual WND Window Overview Mode Table of Content il Descriptions so ERU SEI MIU AMI AU LR 1 2 Data Screen esee 2 1 Table of Numeric data 1 2 2 Toggle panel 2 2 3 Command row 3 3 The Data entry ssse 3 1 Forward Distance 3 2 Sideways Offset 3 3 Localiser Azimth sector 3 4 AZ angle in table n estet
189. n level of the hyperbolic lines so they are drawn on an imaginary horizontal plane at a selected height above the surrounding ground level We are normally selecting a level that corresponds to the center of the reflection objects that can be found in the given area Using the or key will alter the projection level while in the graphic screen to ease the cut and try procedure of determining the location of a reflection object 123 Fig BND603 Projections of hyperbolic lines for an elevated reflection object We assume the reflecting point is located in the same position as in example 6 1 but now at 15m height above the terrain level giving the following bends Distance Bendlength 3000m 2188m 2500m 1118m 2000m 404m Entering these values will give divergent hyperbolic curves that do not cross but lay inside each other See fig BND606 Lifting the projection level up to 15m will give the result where the hyperbolic curves are converging in one point See fig BND605 Lifting the projection level up to 30m will give the result where the hyperbolic curves do converge but give another solution See fig BND606 AXIS 330 NANCO BND 18 20 AUG 1994 See Bend Analysis Mode Bend Analysis Track AZ 0 Proj level Gm 1004 i Samples _ _ 1 Fig BND604 Divergetnt hyperbolic lines for zero level projection for a reflecting point 1250m directly in front of the 3 GP elevat ed 15m The curves are not to
190. n the AXIS 330 will indicate some abnormalities in the system or environment 2 Theo The Theo is a theodolite guided approach tracked by a theodolite at a given position relative to the GP zero a point at the foot of the antenna mast 3 Level The Level run is a simulation of approaching at a constant level fixed height If scattering objects are entered into the terrain model reflections may show bends and scalloping along the approach AXIS 330 ONANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 AP P 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Panel The data panel shows the values to be used in the approach mode computation The data panel is divided into three main parts 1 the table of numeric data 2 the toggle panel 3 the command row Y E Elevation angle quPicale center z Sui Full scale is SDU offset Track azimuth Start Distance End Distance Increment Step Receiver speed Receiver filter Approach Erase Data for new run 3 080 122m 90 0809 CCdat Limit 88BB8m 4 3NM CDDisplay im E rase 58m CGdraph dir 165kts CIDncr x 2 6 rad s 42 Scale Origin sc Parameter AA Sdense SAA lt T gt racking KPDescription CNDormalized Fig APP201 The data panel of the approach mode 2 1 Table of Numeric data 1 The numeric data shows the values to be used in the computation The numeric data can be changed by the F2 change command Here is a brief description of the table of the numeric data El
191. n the F3 key Setup oruse an Editor to modify it See chapter 3 of this appendix for the content Contains the lastvalues you were running including all error settings and all reflection objects There as a separate file for each user in the network version The F6 key will retrieve these data at the Control Panel See chapter 4 of this appendix for the content Contains the current parameters for start stop and incre ment values in Vertical and Approach mode The last used values can be saved in the GP 004 file in the Control Panel Setup lt F3 gt key Contains the codes for graphic screen colours See chapter 5 of this appendix for the content Help screen figures for scattering objects with textlines Help screens for using the keys Alltextlines in the software divided into sections Text file containing information of the new features or chang es given to each version Text file for information about changes in the GP10 UK GP12 UK files If another language is used the correspond ing files must be updated accordingly to get the correct text inthe program The MAIN running file The module for computing the average Forward Slope The module for setting and adjusting the ADU and MCU AXIS 330 AX2 2 NANCO Software 20 UN 2005 Appendix 2 Files in the AXIS 330 3 The file GP INI Comments are written italics and do not appear in the file AXIS 330R40 Defaultsetup 3 15011404010704 12 5 0
192. nce is zero the entry is cancelled For ard Fiotanoe From GF Fig BND307 Display for entering the forward distance of the ground edge Sideways Distance normally zero The sideways distance is the lateral distance between the GP centerline and the reference point on the edge normally zero Use negative values towards runway regardless if it is to the right hand or left hand side of the GP antenna Er Fig BND308 Display for entering the sideways distance of the object AXIS 330 NANCO BND 8 20 AUG 1994 ues Bend Analysis Mode 3 3 3 Distance s where bends are computed The software is asking repeatedly to enter distances where the bends are computed until a zero is entered or the maximum number of 6 distances are entered arp rs ILE ULIDEPATE IMELATORH FAH 000 Eater Aitte where Beads shall be cepted Distsere Cir t mmo Distaere CFF gt Distant C t Gi Distaepe CA m Fig BND309 Three distances are entered in Make Bends Option 3 4 Data Panel In the Data Panel are shown 1 Entered analyse option or calculated make option bend points 2 Computing and graphic control data 3 Command row CFEC ase P Text CP ee OCR Dpat spe Fig BND310 Data Panel of the Bend Analysis mode 3 4 1 Bend points 1 A list of entered points include the point number distance and the bend wave length Note These values can not be changed in the data panel These points will be
193. nds by a factor of 3 to 5 over the fuselage For larger aircraft there might be interesting to model the fuselage in addition to the tailfin but this must be done as a separate task The final sensitive area will then be the outer limit when both diagrams are superimposed on the same graph This is simply done by putting the two sheets on top of each other and look towards a strong light source AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 SNS 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 2 Scan Area data 1 The scan area data entry is selected by the 1 key number one The scan area data is including the scanning steps and the size of the area where the scattering sheet is moved GRIS FRA ILE GLIDEPATE SIMPLATOR SH nt WT i LE ce APER Sosa byla dist m Wa Som step dist Cal o paR X ler reet tar x 18 Some width tm L IFE Fide lecremeat tm OX i8 Fig SNS301 Data Entries for the Scan Area Note Entry for the scan area data is disabled if the memory already in cludes the earlier computed data Erase toggle DATA 3 2 1 Start Distance Scan begin dist m lt 10 gt The longitudinal distance from the GP mast where the scan starts 3 2 2 Stop Distance Scan stop dist m 1000 The longitudinal distance from the GP mast where the scan is stopped even if the sensitive area extends If the sensitive area extends beyond this distance the end tips of the area line will have a small circle atta
194. ng aircraft or any other metallic construction move it around and optionally rotate it to find the worst case orientation The computing result will be shown as the graphic curve of the sensitive area This mode is useful for finding the border of the sensitive area See section SNS CPN 32 20 AUG 1994 AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS 330 User s Manual Table of Content dis Descriptions dar det Ne D HET CDS 2 Data Panel eerte tete pipe ue ed pe ape redire doc er RH 3 Data Enttys s iiU RE EUER dt 3 1 Site Data Extra Signals GPside and Ant type 3 2 Printer Screen RX Filter and Character Settings 3 3 2 1 Form Feed for Printer 3 2 2 Screen Type 3 2 3 Receiver Filter 3 2 4 Character Set 3 3 Other settings 3 3 1 CDI DDM Selection 3 3 2 Meters Feet selection sesssseeeee 3 3 3 Language selection 3 3 4 Renaming the Work and Graph directories 4 Golo r Settings 5 tert e OE EPIO RIS APERIT ROS 4 1 Change ColoUts eese eee eee etes 42 Colours Cod6s iactiet athe pede eee eene er ertet 5 Command Panel 2 ener te i e RUE RE dune 5 1 Language F2 5 2 Save SFr rennes 5 3 Rename default directories F4 5 4 Delete User s Code F5 suus 5 5 Save current Run Toggle settings sessessss 5 6 Delete Run Toggle settin
195. ng the number of wires 2 2 9 Reflection Factor Rfl The reflection factor is the ratio between incident and reflected rf signal The factor depends on the material of the object Generally the better conductivity and smoothness of the material the higher factor should be used Reflection factor 48 01 1 88 1 gt Glass metal Reflected Smooth metal SAU 4 43 gt 4 4 L Incident P4 7 k 7 Antennas Scattering sheet Fig SCA218 Display for entering the reflection factor The reflection factor of the wire is set typically between 0 5 1 0 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 SCA 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 4 Ridge This type of scattering object is used to simulate earth walls or long stretched hills 2 4 1 Forward Distance Fwd The forward distance is the longitudinal distance between the midpoint of the ridge and the GP mast measured along the centerline NOTE Ifthe entered distance is zero the entry is cancelled Forward Distance from GP Fig SCA219 Display for entering the forward distance of the ridge 2 4 2 Sideways Distance Sdw The sideways distance is the lateral distance between the midpoint of the ridge and the GP centerline Use negative values towards runway regardless if it is to the right hand or left hand side of the GP antenna Sideways Distance from GP CL Cm lt gt N N__ center of ridge Ni IN 1 i i N y positive
196. nged by the F2 change command Here is a brief description of the table of numeric data VRT 2 FWD Distance A forward distance from GP zero point to the trace SDW Distance The sideways distance from GP centerline to the trace MIN Angle The start angle of the trace MAX Angle The stop angle ofthe trace Increment The step angle along the trace Receiver speed The speed of the receiver for low pass filtering Scale center The offset of the center axis of the graph Full Scale The graph full scale deflection Description The text added into the graph AXIS 330 GNANCO 20 OCT 1997 Software Vertical Trace Mode 2 2 Toggle Panel 2 The toggles are used to make some quick selections The toggle panel includes the following toggles A mplitude Select logarithmic dB or linear 96 vertical scale D isplay Selection between graph and table E rase Selection between new and old computed curve I ncr x A reduction factor of the increment step 1 2 or 1 4 P arameter Selects the displayed parameter CDI CSB SBO BBP or phase S ense The direction of the Y axis of the graph 90Hz up or down M ultiple For more than one curve on the graph H gt scale Make an additional elevation scale in meters 2 3 Command row 3 The row of the commands includes the commands which start the function or control the program execution F2 Change Change one or more data items F3 Text Enter text line to be displayed with the graph F4 FSD Ch
197. nglish the text and the letter within brackets should be different and the com mand will respond to the new letter 4 1 d B or 96 Toggles the amplitude scale between and dB linear scale dB logarithmic scale 10 dB div Note The effect of this toggle is only seen in the amplitude parameters such as CSB SBO etc 4 2 D isplay Selection for the display mode of the computed results GRAPH graphical output TABL table output 4 3 E rase Selection for erasing the earlier computed data OK the data in the memory has been erased and a new curve may now be computed DATA the memory still contains the latest result and the curve may be displayed again with altered toggle settings 4 4 I ncr x Reduce the increment to 1 2 of the current one in order to increase the resolution in case there are short bends on the curve 1 Increment is same as set in table of numeric data Ye Incrementis divided by two representing double resolution 4 5 P arameter This toggle is used to select a parameter for graphic CDI DDM the deviation in uA CDI or DDM The parameter depends on the hot key lt Alt D gt selection in the Control Panel Ampl the CSB and SBO curve together CSB the CSB amplitude SBO the SBO amplitude bbp the Beam Bend Potential with 100 as a full scale BBP the magnified Beam Bend Potential with 1096 as a full scale Phase the Phase of SBO CSB AXIS 330 NANCO LAT 6 20 OCT 1997 Software Lateral
198. nstalled Adjustthe Threshold Crossing Height 3 8 3 until the Threshold Distance 3 8 1 shows the actual value If the Threshold Crossing Height now reads less than 15m or more than 18m the GP mast was not located within the correct tolerances 2 Anew site where the ideal antenna position should be found The change in Threshold Distance means that the GP mast must be located at adifferent place so thatthe difference in height between runway height at the threshold and the GP mast has been changed Compute this new height manually and adjust the Step Height until this measured height is read in 3 8 2 Iteration process This again will change the Threshold Distance and the process may be repeat ed if the unlinearity or terrain steps appear differently from the new location and therefore require a new Step Height value 20 AUG 2002 CPN 19 AXIS 330 User s Manual This page is intentionally left blank AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 20 20 AUG 2002 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software Control Panel 4 Function Keys In the Control Panel there are ten function keys available 4 1 F1 Help The F1 key will display a short description on the function and navigation keys as well as the value stepping keys ILE NECUBRUSESTLEEETLUIE DL MEE BELL Pi This Belp Foret PE Les Last Bond We FE REELL te DR E Dife mel de Piles Library FE a Sef lt ete PE Eater wieu Ref lectia Dhpeot os F4 Brilities PF Eaterceiev
199. ntrol Panel F2 MCU settings The MCU Monitor Combining Unit settings routine is called by the F2 key and can be used to simulate adjustments errors or measured values on the MCU F3 ADU adjustments The ADU Antenna Distribution Unit adjustments routine is called by the lt F3 gt key and can be used to simulate adjustments on the ADU F4 Reflection plane slope computation The Reflection Plane RPL slope computation routine is called by the lt F4 gt key and can be used to determine the average weighted forward slope of the RPL and the correct GP zero height F5 Optimize feeds to a Top or Ground Plane This routine is called by the lt F5 gt and can be used for optimizing the M ARRAY Note This utility is enabled and shown only when M ARRAY is selected in the Control Panel AXIS 330 NANCO m 20 AUG 1994 UTL 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 MCU settings The MCU settings routine is the Monitor Combining Unit MCU Panel and can be used to set the monitoring angle to any desired elevation angle by means of pick up loops in each antenna The proper attenuation and phasing of each pick up signal are automatically computed but can be changed to any practical value in order to simulate errors or actual measured values in the MCU The MCU info field in the Control Panel shows the output result CDI or DDM of this MCU panel and hence the monitor response to any setting of the GP system parameters such as
200. o Hgt 11 2 4 6 Reflection Factor Ifl 222425228888 rites oro be epe tee Doo ente 12 2 4 7 Height above second plane Hgt ll 12 2 5 TOP ete ne di de dia eh 13 2 5 1 Forward Distance Fwd dicii nina 13 2 5 2 Sideways Distance SAW eiccces0is 22 ecencetrenenstetecedicadeneduestonenantds 13 2 5 3 Height above GP Zero Hgt sisi ua 14 2 5 4 Reflection Factor Rfl tunis nuen d ni 14 2 5 5 Height above second plane Hgft ll 15 AOT es eeecc C 16 2 6 1 Forward Distance Fwd uides cited rire dinde 16 2 6 2 Angle of edge front Rot ouai retener eec re doas 16 2 6 3 Height above second plane Hgft ll 17 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 SCA AXIS 330 User s Manual SCA ii S EditINJ ODJECIS eT Gated 18 31 Modify DA ne ne 18 32 COMMAS oet cce RR caeco sarda ee 18 SRUNEI SAN o 18 SRI 2 COPY Em 19 3 2 3 F3 Delete qc aA 19 32 4 F4 REMOVE Mee 19 SUE Tice PT D A ed 19 3 2 6 F6 BL One eee e e e ee 19 3 2 1 FT OD MIZE qr 20 3 2 8 Alt F8 Offset all sheets together 20 Sa lt CR gt CTRLPANES T 20 MG poppe UL 21 20 FEB 2010 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Scattering Object Editor 1 Descript
201. oint sample can be taken this will produce only one hyperbolic curve Use a local map and plot the curve on to it to see if it will come near a hill or any other suspected object seen at site survey AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 21 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 4 2 The object falls inside the inversion point When a flight inspection makes an approach the bend frequency gets a mini mum and the bend phase inverts if the aircraft passes through the extended line between the GP mast and the object Measurements taken before this inversion point may not be suitable for bend analysing and may give divergent or mislead ing solutions A convergent solution can only be expected when the object is located outside away from the approach path the direct line between the GP mast and the receiver Converge Diverge Top 122m pt 61m GP i am 800m 1600m Fig BND608 Null Reference GP with a Top F5 located 800m forwards 61m sideways half way to the runway and 5m high A direct line from the GP mast through the object will inter sect the runway centerline at 1600m distance from the GP mast RX S rad s 18Skts Achieved GP DATUN fcteal GP DATUN 2 89 16 678 2 93 4 18 844 Fig BND609 Bend pattern shows inverion taking place outside 1600m BND 22 20 AUG 1994 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Bend Analysis Mode 6 4 3 The actual flight path deviates from the ideal one The
202. ojection level of lines m The hyperbolic lines should be projected on to a level corresponding to the height of the reflection object Cut and try with different levels when the origin of the object is known in order to gain experience in using this feature The and keys are used for level shift when the graphic screen displays the lines 4 1 2 Max Distance on graph X scale Max distance on X Scale 3000 To adjust the display maximum scale along the distance axis To find an opti mum value one has to see the first set of graphic curves to see how far these curves extend 4 1 3 Min Distance on graph X scale Min distance on X Scale 0 To adjust the display minimum scale along the distance axis To find an optimum value one has to see the first set of graphic curves to see where these curves begin 4 1 4 Sideways offset Sideways offset m 122 gt The sideways offset represents the lateral distance from the GP centerline to the flight path Note The negative sign means the distance is measured towards the runway from the GP antenna The positive value shows the distance away from the runway AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 4 2 F3 Description Description nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Enter new Text _ Type the new text max 21 characters that should go along with the graph or just press Enter to leave the present text Note Any longer text than 21 ch
203. ommended to run the AXIS 330 under other utility programs like Windows Norton Commander QUICK DOS certain MENU programs etc These programs may leave no environment space and will occupy memory needed for the computed DATA arrays and thus limit the size of the job to be computed Windows will slow down the computing speed AXIS 330 GEN 8 NANCO 20 JUN 2005 Software General We recommend to run the AXIS 330 directly from the DOS prompt like C gt With exception of first time running the AXIS 330 comes up to its Control Panel showing the standard default setup This setup can be changed by running the setup module through the F3 key on the Control Panel The Control Panel displays a number of parameters that can be changed by value stepping keys when the desired parameter is activated highlighted by the arrow keys Value stepping keys are Increment Decrement Factor Insert lt Delete gt 0 1 lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt 1 lt Ctrl PgUp gt lt Ctrl PgDn gt 10 A brief help about the operating keys is available by lt F1 gt key When all data are set to the desired values press lt Enter gt key to proceed to the MAIN MENU MAIN MENU displays a list of modes you can run with the system parameters entered in the Control Panel AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JUN 2005 GEN 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual 5 8 Structure of the AXIS 330 The AXIS 330 consists of different modules The number of avail
204. omputed result in case there are more data rows than screen rows The display will stop while the screen is full and the user is asked hit any key to continue 4 3 5 CR Quit CR to Quit The Enter key will close the RPL Result Panel and the software will jump to the RPL Command Screen AXIS 330 NANCO Software UTL 14 20 AUG 1994 Utilities RPL slope calculation 5 Optimizing This routine can be used only for optimizing the M ARRAY Optimizing the GP means to suppress the SBO and CSB illumination towards a reflection object or discontinuities in the reflecting plane in order to reduce the occurring bends created by the reflected signals By adjusting the antenna feeds slightly the M ARRAY can be adjusted so that the radiation or ground current will cease in a certain location without affecting the signals at the GP angle and the sectors 5 1 Optimizing type selection When the Optimize is selected by the F5 key in the utility selection panel the optimizing routine will start and the user is asked to select the type of optimizing There are two types available 1 Terrain Illumination cancellation Top for a terrain object that gener ates bends to the GP signals 2 Ground Current limitation Ground for a truncation or a discontinuity ofthe reflection plane lt Bate gt AXIS 339 ILS GLIDEPATH SIMULATOR lt S W BeR gt lt Tine gt Enter data For object H2 of lt
205. on Length 4 L fintennas Fig SCA213 Display for entering the length of the scattering wire AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 SCA 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 2 5 Diameter of each wire d The default diameter is 0 01m 21cm Diameter of each vire Cm lt 61 gt Vire diameter l Antennas Wire section Fig SCA214 Display for entering the diameter of each wire 2 2 6 Height of the wire above the ground Hgt ll Default value is 10 m Height of vire above ground Cm lt 18 Mire section i Measured from vire underside fintennas Fig SCA215 Display for entering the bottom height of the wire NOTE Hgt Ill cannot be set to a lower value than zero meaning the wire is on the ground 2 2 7 Rotation Angle Rot The rotation angle of the scattering object is the horizontal angle between the object and the GP centerline The clockwise rotation is entered as a positive value and the negative value represents the counter clockwise rotation Rotation angle X89 to CL f negative Scattering sheet positive Fig SCA216 Display for entering the rotation angle of the wire AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 8 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 2 2 8 Number of single wires The default value is 1 Number of single wires 1 99 0000 E Number of wires in the given wire section if Antennas Fig SCA217 Display for enteri
206. on the ratio will be 0 5 The correlation factor might still be 1 in this case meaning the curves are similar in appearance except for the Y scale deflection 7 2 Functions The functions of the graph display are F1 B amp W Black amp White to Colour Selector F2 Invert Display invert the colours for cut amp paste purposes F3 Print Print the curve to a printer F4 Save Save a B amp W graph for later play back 7 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector F1 B amp W This function is used to toggle the graph between colour and black amp white The F1 key will turn the graph into black background and white lines Repeat ing the F1 key will restore the colour display 7 2 2 F2 Display Inverter F2 Invert This function will invert the colours of the display In the colour display the colours will be changed to their complementary ones 7 2 3 F3 Printout F3 Print This function allows the feed parameters and the graph to be printed out for documentation purposes Make sure that correct printer driver Grafplus or Gra flasr is loaded before starting the AXIS 330 otherwise no graph will be printed only the text Normally this is done by the GP BAT file Note If you haven t the colour printer it is recommended to change display inverted black amp white mode using F1 and F2 keys before print ing g AXIS 330 FIX 12 NANCO 20 OCT 1997 Software Fixed Position Mode 7 2 4 F4 Graph S
207. on on the graph l ncr x A reduction factor of the increment step 1 2 or 1 4 X scale Select distance scale in meters feet or Nautical Miles O rigin Xsc Start point of the X scale Threshold or Antenna system P arameter Select display parameter as CDI or Modulus S ense The direction of the Y axis of the graph 90Hz up or down T racking Track mode hyperbolic theodolite or level run N ormalized Cancel the effect of signal loss as a function of the distance 2 3 Command Row 3 The Command Row includes the commands which start the function or control the program execution F2 Change Change one or more data items F3 Text Enter text line to be displayed with the graph F4 FSD Change the Y scale Full Scale Deflection F6 Excel Enable an Excel readable file Note this command is shown only when the Display toggle is selected for Table F10 Menu Returnto menu CR Continue Starts the computation AXIS 330 ONANCO Mild 20 SEP 2006 APP 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 Data Entry The numeric data are entered by the F2 command allowing to change one or more items The present value is always shown between angle brackets Enter new value from the keyboard or press Enter to keep the present value The content of the data entry is changed according to the selected tracking mode Hyper Theo Level Approach 9801 Erase Data for new run AYPleuel feet 1560 SDW offs
208. or ON OFF F En Rowe olider to the RIGHT Connector ONZUFF c rea Rove olider FAST to the LEFT LICTELIFaEn Rowe clides FAST to the EIGHT courbe ANY Hay Fig UTL303 Help Screen 3 2 Value stepping keys CTRL PgUp Incr CTRL PgDn Decr Value stepping keys are used to change the parameter values Note The phase shifters are slider types and the values are adjusted with the lt Left Right gt arrow keys 3 3 Returning with value settings lt Enter gt RETURN By pressing lt Enter gt key the software return to the Control Panel and ADU settings will be effective 3 4 Returning without any settings FlO Quit The lt F10 gt returns the program execution to the Control Panel with original set tings UTL 8 20 AUG 1994 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Utilities ADU 4 Reflection plane slope computation The Reflection plane RPL slope computation routine can be used to determine the average weighted forward slope FSL of the reflection plane by entering measured terrain heights along a line in front of the antenna mast In addition to the slope the correct GP zero height for the antennas will be calcu lated The computation uses the least squares method as well as optical reflection geometry combined with estimated ground current for the actual GP antenna system This method is based on many years of experience to find correct anten na heights during setup and will save a lot of flying time to ve
209. or the number of fixed points 1 One fixed point will be handled 2 Two fixed points will be handled 4 6 P arameter Selection for the parameter to be displayed in graph diagram CDI selection between CDI in uA and DDM Ampl SBO and CSB amplitude CSB CSB amplitude SBO SBO amplitude Phase the SBO CSB phase Note The amplitude display is depending on the toggle A mplitude AXIS 330 NANCO FIX 8 20 OCT 1997 Spare Fixed Position Mode 5 Commands There are six commands in Fixed Position Data Panel that is used to control the program execution or to allow to enter numeric data 5 1 F2 Change The Change command is used to modify the receiver location s See chapter 3 Data Entry of this section 5 2 F3 Text This command is used to change the description text line to be shown in the graphic diagram 5 3 F4 FSD and F7 Center of scale Graph Full Scale Deflection FSD 800 400 200 100 50 25 12 6 uA Default value in this mode is 50uA on the full vertical scale but can be changed to any of the indicated values Move the cursor with the Left Right arrow keys and press Enter 5 4 F5 Errors This command is used to set the Error Parameters to be examined and the amount of errors to be introduced See section 3 5 5 F6 Excel Note This command is only shown and enabled when the Display toggle is selected as a TABL With this command you can generate an Excel readable file When the
210. ort F6 gt List F gt Optimize lt CR gt CtrlPan Fig SCA302 Optimized settings after F6 List command 20 JAN 2005 SCA 19 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 2 7 F7 Optimize Optimize command is used to set antenna feeds so that the highlighted scat tering object will give a minimum bends on the glide path Note Optimizing is done only for the highlighted scattering object 3 2 8 Alt F8 Offset all sheets together Offset sheets is used when several sheets are brought together to simulate a complex shaped object like the airplane simulated in the file B747TAX Sim ply type the offset distance in x fwd Y sdw and z hgt and press lt enter gt Date AXIS 338 ILS GLIDEPATH SIMULATOR S N 888 5 Tine Offset all sheets CR Gm Y Gm Z Fm Co Forvards Cm lt 8 1 Sideways Cm lt 8 2 Upvards Cm lt 8 3 Fig 5CA303 The offset entry screen The offset values will be added to the distances given to the objects Rotation or tilt is not possible as common adjustment That must be done individually to each object Offset will only effect S Sheets and W wire section Objects of G Ground R Ridge and T Top will remain in their original positions Date AXIS 338 ILS GLIDEPATH SIMULATOR S N 888 5 Tine Offset all sheets lt Alt F8 x im V 2m Z 3m List of Scattering Objects Obj Type Fud Sdu Lgt Hgt d Hgt II Rot Tilt Rf1 Opt Setup 1 lt S gt 368m 166m 180 80m 18 8m 4 8
211. ory of Diffraction UTD AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 AX1 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual There may be an optional secondary reflection plane below the edge which in the model is assumed to be a smooth horizontal surface with a fixed reflection factor of 0 9 The vertical height difference between the secondary plane to the edge can be set between 0 1m to 999m If this heightis set to zero a secondary plane is assumed to be non existing like a very rough and absorbing terrain and only the edge will radiate like a free space signal source Diffracted Diffracted Reflectec Fig AX1 406 Diffracted and diffracted reflected signals Diffracted M O MM Fig AX1 407 Diffracted signal only when Hgt Il is set to zero AXIS 330 NANCO AX1 10 20 AUG 1999 Software Appendix 1 Glide Path Model The diffracted signal is computed on the edge along the direct line between each antenna elementand the receiver The longitudinal distance to the edge is en tered by the user for a point located directly in front ofthe GP mast The actual diffraction point will vary depending on the receiver position and the azimuth angle of the edge GP Fig AX1 408 Diffraction point will depend on the receiver position and the azimuth angle ofthe edge If the diffraction point moves inwards closerthan 50m from the runway centerline itis assumed that the runway shoulders will meet the edge and the diffraction will c
212. panel shows the values and settings to be used in ground current cal culation The data panel consists of three main parts 1 the numeric data 2 the toggle panel 3 the commands Cred Carrast BERE tart Dizrtamcz tep LDiztaecc i Step Dirbama Sideways rack BHuEDrreriptiss F m ii PEN ISETUTESTTTIDTEZI UT Fig GND201 The data panel of the ground current mode Numeric data The numeric data show the values to be used in the computation The numeric data are entered by F2 Change command key Here is a brief description of the numeric data Start Distance The start distance from the GP mast Stop Distance The stop distance from the GP mast Step Distance The computation distance increment In three dimensional mode it will be the grid size Sideways Track The sideways distance from the GP mast Negative num bers towards the runway Toggles There are two toggles in the Data Panel controlling the computing result D isplay The selection between two or three dimensional graphic GRAPH 3D and table TABL P arameter The selection between CSB SBO and CLR AXIS 330 NANCO GND 2 20 OCT 1997 Software Ground Current Mode Commands F2 Change Activate a numeric data entry for changing one or more numeric data F3 Text Entry for a text line Description to be displayed in graph screen F6 Excel Enable an Excel readable file to be generated Note This command is only shown and enabled when
213. phic is started by the W in toggle 6 1 Two dimensional graphic The 2D diagram includes a lot of information and changes according the dis played parameter but can be divided into four parts 1 Equipment information 2 Graphic diagram 3 Elevation angles for given CDI values 4 Half sectors Additionally on the bottom row there are four functions available for handling the graph result Hihii see Eros the Gal e 16000 Bess HE 1 Tige H ABBAT CEGS Rat KATHREIN ZL ETS 50 8 CLE WF ETC 58 8 FRE 1BB8 8 El amp satine angles 3 CBI B E 225 4 155 3 143 3 153 158 31 712 3 735 3 719 FEAH FZ Ewwert FSIFeiet P4540 Fig WND601 The typical graphic diagram for the CDI parameter AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 WND 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 1 Equipment info 1 This part of the screen gives the information of the equipment status showing the GP type Antenna type Values of extra signals and the amplitude and CDI value of the CLR signals in A1 A3 2 Graphic diagram 2 The top row tells where the window center is located and from where it is seen On the left hand top of the graphic square is shown the SDW offset and the width of the Window diagram in meters for 12 at the FWD distance The graphic diagram shows the ISO CDI lines with the following values 225 uA Fly Down 150 uA Fly Down 75 uA Fly Down 0 uA Course Line 75 uA Fly
214. play back in the AXIS 330 AXIS 330 NANCO APP 12 20 OCT 1997 Software Approach Mode 7 2 5 F8 Scattering Object Editor F8 Scatter Note This function is enabled and displayed only when at least one scat tering object is entered This function starts the scattering object editor in a same way as in Control Panel allowing to modify scattering objects The detailed description is given in SCA section 7 2 6 Alt F8 Offset all Scattering Sheets together non visible Offset the positions of all sheets in X fwd Y sdw and Z hgt coordinates to gether This is useful when moving a complex object that is built up of several sheets AXIS 330 ONANCO 20 OCT 1997 APP 13 Software AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 2 7 Curve Tracer lt Values gt This function is used to show the exact values along the curve The cursor is shown as small square and can be moved along the curve by using the lt Left gt or lt Right gt arrow keys The value of the selected parameter and the distance will be displayed in the upper left hand part of the graphic screen The cursor is moving with one computed step increment selected in data panel while holding the lt Ctrl gt key the steps will be 10 times larger System for document CDI Approach El 3 00 Az 0 0 Sdw 122m 3400m 1 83NM gt 3 26p FSD 50pA Ctr PON FLU ie con eee een Settee Mee osito LON nee in tient ati fertur ds errr PDU
215. put Responds to all pertinent feed changes that can be set on the Control Panel The signal from the width Channel to the monitor input The Displacement Sensitivity when subtracting the the GP signal from the MCU Width signal over the 0 36 sector The signal from the dth Channel to the monitor input ADU Amplitude Distribution Unit output ADU outputs shows the deflection at the two ADU probes Hotkey Alt D can be used to toggle deflection between and uA AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 CPN 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual ADU output ADU A2 400 0uAThe deviation at the ADU A2 output probe for any setting of GP system The negative sign means FLY DOWN ADU A1 100 0uAThe deflection at the ADU A1 output probe for any setting of GP system The negative sign means FLY DOWN When the system is optimized the header ADU output is replaced with Phase stub nn This shows the electrical length of the quadrature cable stub to get 0 deviation at the ADU output probes A2 and A1 This is useful information for setting up the system to optimum performance Phase stub 95 The electrical length of the phasing stub ADU A2 400 0uA ADU A1 100 0uA Note For A2 insert the stub in CSB For A1 insert the stub in SBO For maintenance procedures A2 must be checked and adjusted before A1 This information is useful for on site measurements on the system during setup or maintenance Built in probes at the ADU output
216. r highlight with the Up Down arrow keys to the desired datafield The value is changed with value stepping keys lt PgUp PgDn gt or with Left Right arrow keys The step size of the adjustments is multiplied by 10 with lt Ctrl PgUp Ctrl PgDn gt keys Press F1 to get more help See fig UTL303 Beside the adjustment sliders is shown the numerical value Note Adisconnected antenna is shown as zero amplitude but the AS A1 balance is shown the right value 3 1 2 Connectors 2 Each antenna has a connector so the antenna can be terminated into a dummy load Disconnection Connection can be toggled by moving the cursor highlight with the lt Up Down gt arrowkeys to the desired antenna feed and pressing PgUp PgDn gt lt Left Right gt arrow keys 3 1 3 Commands 3 There are four commands in the ADU Panel 1 F1 Help Help Screen 2 CTRL PgUp Incr CTRL PgDn Decr Value stepping keys 3 Enter RETURN Returning with value settings 4 F10 Quit Returning without any settings 3 1 3 1 Help Fl1 Help The F1 key opens the help screen where the keys used in parameter value settings are described AXIS 330 NANCO uu 20 AUG 1994 UTL 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 1 3 1 3 1 amp Hove older to the LEFT Connector ORR Hou lidar to the RIGHT iConneotur DWARF House to bigber Control or Connector Houe to a lower Control oF Conneota r u Falp Rowe alidee to the LEFT Connect
217. r each antenna They can be used to simulate an amplitude error of the antenna pick up The attenuation can be changed by highlighting the attenuator and using the value stepping keys PgUp PgDn Note Changes in monitoring angle will change the attenuator values auto matically 2 2 3 Phase shifter 3 There are two 20 phase shifters in the MCU one for the A3 pick up and one for the A2 pick up They can be used to simulate a phase error in the antenna pick up The phase setting is changed by using Left Right arrows The phase reference is in antenna A1 Note Changes in monitoring angle will automatically change the antenna phases to 0 or 180 when moving from one lobe to another 2 3 Commands 2 3 1 Simulation angles quick selection 12 lo 3 00 2 75uA 2 640 3 150uA 2 265 4 A3 o 2 000 5 45lo 1 350 6 3llo 0 900 The number keys lt 1 gt lt 6 gt are used to set the monitoring angles that are typi cally used for monitoring Note When the monitoring angle is changed the values of the attenuators and phase will be changed automatically to their correct theoretic values AXIS 330 NANCO UTL 4 20 OCT 1995 bis Utilities MCU 2 3 2 Help Fl Help The F1 key opens the help screen where the keys used in parameter value settings are described Bate REPE FRB RE NON EIHELATPOH WHIT Time Rove older to the LEFT Connector OW OFF Mou Glides to th
218. r worst case orientation in steps of Scatter objects Type Fwd Sdw Lgt Hgt d Hgt II Rot Tilt Rfl Opt Setup wire BEND Analyzing using following points on bendpattern Pnt Dist Bend Length HotY Enter Ground Plane properties Relative Dielectric Constant Conductivity AXIS330 ONANCO SORN TE 20J UN 2005 AX2 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual HotX Enter MCU alarm limits Glide Path Displacement Sensitivity Clearance NF monitor F2key Type EXIT lt U to Return to Program F3key Getting the default settings first F2 Language change F3 SAVE this as the Default setup F4 Rename the Work Graph directories F5 Delete the User Code CR No Change alterable items Form Feed Rx Filter Prt Chrs This is the Setup when starting up or by pressing F5 Set new colours Heading text back Cursor text bar Screen text Background Data Restore to standard Press CR to proceed Enter the file extension country code see list below Now Language Work directory Graph directory F4key Select utility F2 MCU setting F3 ADU Adjustments F4 Reflection plane slope computation F5 Optimize feeds to a Top or Ground Plane F7key Kill lt CR gt to select lt Esc gt to cancel No files found Enter file name Enter model description Sorry You are not authorized to do this Files directory F2 Common or CR Private File Library F2
219. rally the better conductivity and smoothness of the material the higher factor should be used Reflection Factor 48 801 1 Example 26 Reflection Factor 2 gt Press F1 for help Fig SCA224 Display for entering the reflection factor The following table F1 gives a very rough indication of practical values Reflection factor kr Object width x height Small metal constructions cars Small vooden shelters Small hill 18 x w vegetation Small hill 18 x smooth surface Metal object 18 x Medium hill 56 x w vegetation Medium hill 5B x smooth surface Large hill 268 x smooth surface Large hangar 188 x smooth surface Fig 5CA225 Help screen for the reflection factor 2 4 7 Height above second plane Hgft ll The height above a secondary reflection plane beyond the object The default value is zero which means a very rough surface unable to reflect signals Height above second plane Height If no secondary plane exists press lt CR gt Fig SCA226 Display for entering the height of the second plane Note Ifthere are no secondary plane beyond the object enter zero or just press Enter AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 12 20 JAN 2005 Software Scattering Object Editor 2 5 Top The scattering type Top is simulating a semispheric terrain object and is used to simulate hills or any other limited size object 2 5 1 Forward Distance Fwd The forward distance is the longitudinal distance betw
220. rent CSB SBO CLR Ground current of the CSB signal will be displayed Ground current of the SBO signal will be displayed Ground current of the Clearance signal will be displayed if the clearance signal is switched on GND 6 20 OCT 1997 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Ground Current Mode 5 Commands 5 1 F2 Change The Change command is used to modify the values of the numeric data used in the computation See chapter 3 Numeric Data Entry of this section 5 2 F3 Text The entry for text line Description to be displayed on the graph Description nnnn Enter New Text Enter new text max 21 letters or just press Enter to keep the present one 5 3 F6 Excel Note This command is only shown and enabled when the Display toggle is selected as a TABL With this command you can generate an Excel readable file When the F6 is pressed the AXIS 330 asks the name of the file as follows Current file name DATA XL lt CR gt or enter new The default name is DATA XL Type a new name or just press Enter to keep the default name The name must be according to the DOS specification other wise it will be truncated name 8 letters and extension 3 letters After the file name is entered this command will be shown as a filename between angle brackets To disable this function press F6 again and the original com mand text F6 Excel is displayed 5 4 F10 Menu Function key lt F10 gt returns
221. ria ek aie o acce o 10 5 Thelow Das STI TT 12 AXIS330 ONANCO Software 20J UN 2005 AX l i AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS330 ONANCO AX1 ii 20AUG 1999 s Appendix 1 Glide Path Model 1 Description The AXIS 330 Software is a mathematical model of a glide path consisting of a glide path antenna system a reflection plane optional scattering objects a receiver lowpass filtering Changes in any of these parts can be done and the software will simulate the signals at given points in the three dimensional space around the model com puting the CDI Course Deviation Indicator in uA or DDM amplitude in or dB phase bend origin lines ground current levels sensitive areas and print out either a table or a graphic diagram It should be noted that no mathematical model can fully simulate a real situa tion A model is always a compromise between accuracy amount of input data and calculation time Adverse terrain like high hills buildings and metal constructions will most likely cause bends on the signals due to reflections or diffraction of the course and or clearance signals into the approach path and coverage sector This model will be of reasonable accuracy to predict the impact of scatters from limited ground plane hills buildings and aircraft tailfin along the taxi ways It is designed for following purposes 3 to find the sensitive area around a specific glide path system in order
222. rify antenna heights based on each elements lobing diagram which might be very unreliable in ad verse terrain baseline averaged 180m 240m GP zero Fig UTL401 FSL computation principle The Forward Slope FSL is an essential parameter to determine the correct antenna heights and SBO amplitude It is of paramount importance to estimate this as correct as possible The reflection plane re radiates the total signal from the GP antennas towards the approach sector The amplitude of the re radiation is a function of the in duced ground current at a given point on the ground surface In addition the re radiation towards the approach path follows mainly the optical geometry of the antenna images When these two considerations are combined one find as a general rule that the area from 20m to approx 180m in front of the GP antennas forms the main reflecting area The area inside does not reflect the signal towards the approach sector and the area beyond has decreasing impact on the total reflected signal due to decaying ground current depending on the GP system parameters and the terrain slopes To compute the average forward slope of the reflecting plane the main section 20 180m is averaged and called the base line The plots beyond this section are then compared to the base line extension and the difference is multiplied by a weighted factor given by the computed ground current These new values are added to the present base
223. ring object Fig AX1 402 Thescattering geometry for incidentand emanentsignals The double integration is made over the area of the scat tering object 4 1 3 Shadowing The direct signal will not pass through the sheet Only the diffracted signal from the sheet center will be received behind it This will cause the CDI DDM value to be constantin the shadow region as there will be only one signal source with a fixed SBO CSB ratio Dividing the sheet into two adjacent half sheets will correct this problem AXIS 330 AX1 6 NANCO 20 AUG 1999 Software Appendix 1 Glide Path Model 4 2 The Wire Section The W type scattering model is used to simulate a section of parallel wires Itis quite similarto the S type where the reflected and diffracted signals in cer tain directions are computed by integration overthe length of the section butthe wires will have a nearcylindric free space re radiation diagram The effective reflection factor depends also on the wire diameter and the number of independ ent wires within the section The usershould setthe reflection factorto 1 for metal wire as the computed factor will be limited by the integration Due to assumed uneven terrain the reflection factor in the ground between wire and the receiver is setto 0 9 4 3 The Semispheric Hill Top The T type scattering model is used to simulate a semispheric terrain like hills or any other limited sized object A general reflecting objectof
224. rinting the graph ic Screens on a certain printer Since there are so many different types of print ers on the market a specially tailored driver is needed that can combine a given graphic screen with a given printer type GRAFPLUS and GRAFLASR are very versatile drivers that can serve most screen printer combinations on the market How do we install a printer driver The AXIS 3 5 diskettes contain these drivers in the GRAF subdirectory and they will automatically copied into the AXIS directory during installation ofthe AXIS software The AXIS 5 25 diskettes DO NOT contain printer drivers but a sepa rate GRAFPLUS diskette is enclosed in the shipment Copy the content of this diskette into the installed AXIS directory How do we tell grafplus our printer type This is done by a command line in the AL BAT and GP BAT file GRAFPLUS is used for ordinary DOT MATRIX printers GRAFLASR is used for LASER and INK type printers Run either GRAFPLUS or GRAFLASR for finding the number of your printer by typing one of these two names and pressing Enter A list of possible printers will be displayed Press lt Enter gt to get next screen as lon as you find the your printer type or equivalent Note the printer number and exitthe program by Ctrl Break Use a text editor to change the grafplus 1 line in the batch file AL BAT or GP BAT if necessary to the corresponding number of the printer type The batch file will afterthis modific
225. rn of the GP antenna 3 5 Antenna Element Feeds The feeds of each antenna consists of six adjustable parameters that can be used to simulate the effect of the misalignment 3 5 1 Amplitude errors Antenna Ampl dB The Antenna amplitude errors can be used to simulate the reduced or increased antenna gain The normal value is 100 or 0 dB Use the hotkey Alt B to tog gle display between 96 and dB Note The setting will effect all signals in the antenna element 3 5 2 Phase errors Antenna Phas The Antenna phase errors can be used to simulate the antenna radiating phase The normal value is 0 Note The setting will effect all signals in the antenna element 3 5 3 CSB amplitudes Antenna Ampl The relative CSB amplitudes referenced to the nominal CSB in A1 2100 The value of CSB in A2 is the RTC of CSB A1 CSB in A3 should be zero but can be set to simulate CSB leakage into to upper antenna 20 AUG 1994 CPN 15 AXIS 330 User s Manual 3 5 4 CSB phases Antenna Phas These are the absolute CSB phases CSB phase in Antennatl iis the reference of the entire system and changing this value is equal to acomplementary phase change in all other signal components 3 5 5 SBO amplitudes Antenna Ampl The relative SBO amplitudes defined as the 150Hz sideband vector relative to Carrier vector in CSB A1 The SBO in A2 is the main SBO component depend ing on the FSL value
226. rotated to the worst case orientation to find the border of the sensitive area where this object will produce a specified bend amplitude at a selected receiver location or flight path The objective is to obtain qualified restrictions for the movement of various aircraft and vehicle types V Simulating the drifting of system parameters Stability testing by introducing changes in antenna feeds and their mechanical alignment as well as reflection plane slopes to learn what impact this will have on both nearfield and farfield signals within the coverage limits This is important in order to specify maintenance limits for the system in order to set the proper alarm limits in the moni tors as well as finding the signal response at the ground measurement points on specific installations VI Training To learn how the ILS Glide Path system really works under all possible and impossible situations A nearly unlimited theory book that adds neatly into any ILS theory course to supply the instructor with an ani mation and demonstration tool GEN 2 20 JUN 2005 General 3 History This software has been under development for many years and the code is optimized to give practical results based on extensive experience with field and Flight Inspection measurements The file A330 NEW contains the historical development information Use the N hot key in the Control Panel to read this file on screen Any user that did suggest changes that have
227. rther processing with excel 5 9 F9 To see the values in table form FWD dist SDW dist and Worst case angle 5 10 CR Continue lt Enter gt key will start the Sensitive Area computation AXIS 330 NANCO SNS 14 20 JAN 2005 ac Sensitive Area Mode 6 Computed Result The result of the sensitive area computation is shown always in the graph form A cursor is moving down the graph to show the present location of the scattering object during computation At any time the computation can be stopped by the lt F10 gt key There is also CDI tone available by the F9 key for audio monitor ing The momentarily computed bend result will give a tone frequency of CDI HA x100 Hz This function operates as an on off switch The sensitive areas may sometimes have quite a different shape from what one might expect The area size will also increase with the ILS operational category II III as the receiver will move along a track to test the scattering The result is very dependent on the aircraft speed and the receiver plotter fre quency response due to the filtering effect 6 1 Graphic Display The graphic display consists of a dotted grid with 100m per square The position of the receiver is shown as a small circle Other shown items are depending on the data and toggle settings upstem for dncumewt Semzitiwe free b p EN pos F Gin X 122m HS Hh Full zidezram Fit CPS leert PE Friet Fi idee Fig SNS6
228. s F lhcatter Fig VRT702 The typical 3D graphic diagram of the vertical trace mode for the CDI parameter AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 VRT 11 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 2 Functions The functions of the graphic display are F1 B amp W Black amp White to Colour Selector F2 Invert Display invert the colours for cut amp paste purposes F3 Print Print the curve to a printer F4 Save Save a B amp W graph for later play back F8 Scatter Scattering Object Editor Alt F8 Offset all sheets together lt Values gt Curve Tracer Only for 2D graphs 7 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector F1 B amp W This function is used to toggle the graph between colour and black amp white The lt F1 gt key will turn the graph into black background and white lines Re peating the lt F1 gt key will restore the colour display 7 2 2 F2 Display Inverter F2 Invert This function will invert the colours of the display In the colour display the colours will be changed to their complementary ones 7 2 3 F3 Printout F3 Print This function allows the feed parameters and the graph to be printed out for documentation purposes Make sure that correct printer driver Grafplus or Gra flasr is loaded before starting the AXIS 330 otherwise no graph will be printed only the text Normally this is done by the GP BAT file Note If you haven t the colour printer it is recommended to change display inverted b
229. s the new nominal monitor values must be set This is only nec essary to do if checking the integral alarm limits is part of the simulations Alt F5 Reset M ARRAY to 50180 Hot key lt Alt F5 gt removes any optimized setting of the M ARRAY and resets to 50 RTS amp RTC and 180 PHX a so called nominal 50180 setting This Hot key does not reset any other parameters nor any scattering objects AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 CPN 29 AXIS 330 User s Manual 6 Main Menu The program execution comes into the main menu when Enter is pressed in the Control Panel I Dates BENT iiu ILS GLEDEPSIS ZimsLATPOH CM EL EI HEHE alert Mode by Member zr Bree boys BH Coestrel Fasal Pua Playback crecus files Lateral Trace Wartical Trace Mision Care Lam Sippreech Pirmd Paritism Creed Curramt fend Bmaluriz Samzritiwr Bema Carremt MODE 8 gt Primt PP ction fed Dir GP Typ Sow bere RE romp T 3 Fig CPN601 Main Menu of the AXIS 330 Available options are depending on the access level of the user If you do not have access to the option you can not highlight or use it The number between the angle bracket below the menu list shows the current selections Current MODE lt 1 gt Press the item number or highlight the item with Up Dn keys and press Enter to run a current mode Lower part of the main menu screen are shown some settings of the Control Panel as follows
230. s where bends are computed 3 4 Data Panel ee eu e as E Eee 3 4 1 Bend points 1 5 2 1 Bie ne ip HE ep edes 3 4 2 Projection level and Graphic scales 2 3 4 3 Command row 3 4 Commands 4 1 F2 Change data 4 1 1 Projection Level 4 1 2 Max Distance on graph X scale sess 4 1 3 Min Distance on graph X scale 4 1 4 Sideways offset 4 2 F3 Description Ss 4 9 FTO Men ioco et D o One ee 4 4 CR Continue 5 Graph Diagram 5 1 Graphic Screen 5 2 Position Adjustments 5 2 1 Projection Level 5 2 2 Y shift paneon nhy 5 2 3 Minimum Distance 5 2 4 Maximum distance AXIS 330 NANCO Soitware 20 AUG 1994 BND i AXIS330 User s Manual D 3 FURCIQNS RE 16 5 3 1 Black amp White to Colour Selector ssesssss 16 59 2 Display Inverter ss RHONE Rn 16 SRREON CHIMIE 16 5 3 4 Graph Saver ss 16 6 Analysing examples nete rr tene erede deett 17 6 1 Reflecting object at near zero height 17 6 2 Reflecting object at 15m height ssssssseess 18 6 3 Reflecting object for a normal GP site 20 6 4 Convergence of the hyperbolic curves eeesseeeee 21 6 4 1 Several reflection objects ss
231. s a tool for finding the border of the sensitive area where a given object will produce bends of a pre determined amplitude on the GP signals The objective is to advise the airport authority in establishing movement restrictions for vehicles taxing aircraft lifting cranes de icing equipment etc ICAO Annex 10 limits the maximum bend amplitude as follows CAT 30uA down to ILS point C CAT II amp Ill 30uA down to ILS point A from ILS point A decreasing at a linear rate to 20uA at ILS point B 20uA down to ILS point T ILS reference datum This will be the total in a bend budget consisting of the geometric sum of the static bends from fixed installations and the dynamic bends from moving objects The AXIS 330 will simulate the tailfin of a moving aircraft or any other metallic construction move it around and optionally rotate it to find the worst case orien tation in producing the greatest bend amplitude along the selected receiver flight path or fixed location Enter the amount of existing static bends and the AXIS 330 will compute and draw the sensitive area for the remaining allowed dynamic bends for any glidepath system and aircraft type A general consensus for allowed bends from moving objects is that they should be restricted to 4uA each This value is considered to just start small disturbances along the flight path In AXIS 330 the default value is therefore set to 4pA AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 SNS 1
232. s available Enter a number from 1 to 6 according to the error type Note Parameter 5 amplitude and 6 phase will be changed both SBO and CSB signal of the selected antenna Wet Snow Layer In the Wet Snow Layer simulation the AXIS 330 will change the thickness of the snow layer from Om to 1m In this case no other parameter is asked except the centerline of the graphic 3 2 2 Error range Next step of the numeric data entry is the error range selection that includes the entry for max and min error as well as the error increment step RIK Error dB 4 Q BW Exrur dio 13 i Amp selected sod Ince Btup dE 4 MIM Eveor lt gt 38 gt o A MX Error dei dar Phase selected Ince E amp ug LS i gt I Graph finals Centerline uj Fig FIX303 Data entry for the error range Note For amplitude errors enter the error in dB s and for phase errors enter the error in degrees AXIS 330 NANCO Software FIX 6 20 OCT 1997 Fixed Position Mode 3 3 1 Start Value of the Error MIN Error dB 10 The MIN error is the start value of the error simulation and the value should be the lowest number 3 3 2 End Value of the Error MAX Error dB 10 gt The MAX error is the end value of the error simulation and the value should be the highest number 3 3 3 Increment Step of the Error INCR Step dB 1 The INCR Step is the value of the calculation step Note The value must b
233. s direotors SHOW Wo sorsan Files auallaMH e Bit ang Bee one Fig PLY203 There are no screen files in the selected directory AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 PLY 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 3 Screen files deletion F4 Delete all This command is used to delete all screen files and the directory label in the selected directory Before deletion the directory content is displayed and the AXIS 330 will ask Are you sure Y N Pressing the Y key the deletion will take place Any other key will return the program to the Main menu Note This command will delete only the screen files and labels for the AXIS 330 AXGnn BAS S205 ERA ILE GLIDEPAIS ZIHSLATOR CriWiddgdr Date five Tam Sere OFM man has rra hai Bars lias Er nu Bands ss B t aca 432Y 1 amp E Hubrz fre Fig PLY204 Deletion of the screen files 2 4 Set your own show directory F5 New directory This command is use to select the user s screen files directory The user is asked to enter a name of directory as follows Enter new directory lt CR gt Default gt Type the name of your directory and press Enter If just Enter is pressed the AXIS 330 will set the default screen files directory as SHOW Note If the directory does not exist it can be created by the F8 key 2 5 Go to DOS F6 To DOS Temporary access to DOS The AXIS 330 occupies about 350kB of RAM leaving the remaining memory available for any other use
234. s for antenna 1 and 2 makes the initial setup and later checks a lot easier and safer Registration info and Function keys 5 The row for Registration info shows to whom the program has been registered On the last row of the screen there are shown ten available function keys lt F1 gt lt F10 gt in the Control Panel Detailed description of the F keys are given in the chapter 4 of this section 2 2 Data Fields There are a lot of data fields in the Control Panel that can be changed The data fields are grouped into the 8 groups as follows 1 Site Data 2 M ARRAY additions 3 GP side of runway and an antenna type 4 Mechanical setting of each antenna 5 RF Feeds for each antenna 6 CL Monitor position 7 Transmitter Data 8 Threshold Data AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 4 20 OCT 1995 Se Control Panel Bratturx la F Enos Ho 2F93 E N T 3 Bcn Er i b C 1 eE d Ep 5 Tw BEdE H2 gruke dBE def BB Al probni H7 6pH Fig CPN202 The data field groups on the Control Panel Site Data 1 The Site Data are comprised of the GP type the operating frequency and all necessary environment information for calculation M ARRAY additions 2 This group concerns only the M ARRAY glidepath system and contains data fields for CSB SBO ratios RT RTC RTS phasing PHX as well as CLR ampli tude and modulation balance CDI Note This group will not be activated for single frequency systems GP side o
235. s line intersects the ridge the signals will behave like a T type object If this line goes outside the ridge the top will stay at AX1 8 AXIS 330 NANCO 20 AUG 1999 Software Appendix 1 Glide Path Model the nearestend ofthe ridge and the reflection factor drops suddenly to one third ofthe selected value Fig AX1 405 The simulated reflection point moves until it hits the end of the ridge If a real ridge is nothorizontal or changes direction or height several ridges could be modelled beside each other so the combinations of length and azimuth rotation angles will make their ends meet Forreflection factors and reflection in a secondary reflection plane referto the textforT type 4 5 The Truncated Ground Plane The G type scattering model is used to simulate a ground truncation discontinui ty of the reflection plane The reflection plane should be several hundred meters long in order to provide a nearideal ground reflection foreach antenna element When the available ground plane is too short the induced ground current atthe ending edge will yield a non homogeneous diffracted signal that will interfere with the homogeneous direct glide path signals The G type model for limited ground plane is a smooth linear reflection plane ending in a 90 angle truncation The edge ofthe reflection plane will create a diffracted signal from each ofthe radiating antenna elements computed accord ing to the Uniform The
236. s of buildings construc tions or aircraft tailfins etc 2 2 1 Forward Distance Fwd The forward distance is the longitudinal distance from the GP mast to the midpoint of the object measured along the GP centerline NOTE Ifthe entered distance is zero the entry is cancelled Forward Distance from GP Scattering sheet l EN FUD Distance Fig SCA202 Display for entering the forward distance of the sheet 2 2 2 Sideways Distance Sdw The sideways distance is the lateral distance from the GP centerline to the midpoint of the object Use negative values towards runway regardless if it is to the right hand or left hand side of the GP antenna Sideways Distance from GP CL Cm lt GP mast f negative m GP CL positive Scatter object Fig SCA203 Display for entering the sideways distance 2 2 3 Size of the sheet The size of the sheet can be entered in two ways 1 Entering Length Height and Bottom height or 2 Loading the sheet from the SCATT UK file A load mode is selected by pressing F2 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 SCA 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 2 3 1 Length Height Bottom Height Length Lgt The default value of the length is 10 m for the sheet Length of Sheet Cm lt 18 F2 gt Enter size from object list Length Mm Antennas Scattering sheet Fig SCA204 Display for entering the length of the scatt
237. s set in table of numeric data Ve Incrementis divided by two representing double resolution Ya Incrementis divided by four representing quadruble resolution 4 5 P arameter This toggle is used to select a parameter for graphic CDI DDM the deviation in uA CDI or DDM The parameter depends on the hot key Alt D selection in the Control Panel Ampl the CSB and SBO curve together CSB the CSB amplitude SBO the SBO amplitude bbp the Beam Bend Potential with 100 as a full scale BBP the magnified Beam Bend Potential with 1096 as a full scale Phase the Phase of SBO CSB AXIS 330 NANCO VRT 6 20 OCT 1997 Software Vertical Trace Mode 4 6 S ense Selection for the sense direction in CDI graphic 900 Fly Down is in the upper part of the graphic 900 Fly Down is in the lower part of the graphic 4 7 M ultiple This toggle is used to select single or multi trace output F2 there is only one FWD distance entered Use F2 to make more NO there are more FWD distances entered but only the first one is displayed Press M to switch to YES YES all entered FWD distances of the traces will be displayed Press M to switch to NO 4 8 H gt scale This toggle is used to add height in meters to the x scale NO no height values are added YES the height values are displayed Note The height is only shown when the FWD distance of the trace is less than 1500m AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 VRT 7 AXIS 330 User s
238. screen is se lected as black amp white The Graph Saver is used to save the graphic screen to the disk on a selected SHOW directory The names of the files will be generated automatically and the first save is named as AXGO BAS second AXG1 BAS third AXG2 BAS and so on Before saving go to the Playback menu item on the Main Menu and select the wanted directory See the PLY section The saving format is the basic language BSAVE BLOAD mode enabling the fastest Load and play back in the AXIS 330 AXIS 330 NANCO WND 10 20 AUG 1994 SOR Window Overview Mode 7 More about Window diagram The Window Diagram is a very sensitive indicator to show if something is going wrong It also shows the impact of the scattering objects The Window Diagram can be regarded as a footprint of the installation site and equipment condition Note For M ARRAY s the CLR signal will mask the impact of small errors seen on the CDI lines at lower angles Both theoretical and practical checks should therefore be done with the CLR switched off Hino sese fron the Gel o 190006 Bes U HI Tig MHARRAT CEGS Rat EATHREGM ZL ETS 5d H CLE OFF ETC 594 PHE 1BB Elewat Ens zm 3 chi E 4 187 4 143 4 153 3 725 3 737 3 794 3 321 3 34 3 25 LF 3 007 Z BS3H 2 5465 2 653 2 456 2 615 2 25 2 627 1 5432 2 096 1 779 GEL LF 1 448 1 52 4642 sectors Hom 356 69 394 GG 357 0 406 8 411 G 354 a z mates with nue refl FIJEAM
239. ser module 3 Make two or three entries repeating 1 and 2 and then return to the Main Menu use the Enter key and then lt F10 gt Select Bend Ana lysing mode mode 8 and press Enter several times to proceed directly to the graphic display The crossing of the hyperbolic lines will show where the bends might have their origin AXIS 330 ONANCO Software 20 OCT 1997 APP 15 AXIS 330 User s Manual 7 3 Computing the Glidepath Angle and Datum After a Level Run the GP angle and the sectors are computed and shown at the bottom of the graph After a Hyperbolic or Theodolite approach the average glidepath angle and the height of the downward extension of the straight average glidepath angle above the threshold is computed for two sections of the approach 1 Actual GP Datum Between ILS point A and B 7408m and 1050m before the threshold respectively 2 Achieved GP Datum Between 1830m 6000 and ILS point C 300m 1000 before threshold Since the glidepath courseline bends slightly upwards toward the end of the approach the slope angle will be slightly less for the inner section typically two hundredth of a degree The threshold crossing height will therefore also be slightly higher than the ideal 15m APP 16 20 OCT 1997 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Approach Mode 8 Theodolite positioning The ideal position for a theodolite would be at the foot of the GP mast where the signals have their geo
240. ser s Manual 3 4 3 Forward shift FWD shift cm The GP antennas radiation diagram are referenced to the reflection plane and the antenna mast MUST BE perpendicular to the average reflection plane The FWD forward shift is calculated from the antenna heights and the FSL The forward shift shows the distance in centimetres the antennas must be moved forwards positive or backwards negative referenced to the GP zero point at the bottom of the GP mast To set the mast vertical regardless of the FSL highlight one forward shift field by the cursor and press the key 0 zero Forward Shift i Fig CPN306 The Forward shift of the GP antenna 3 4 4 Azimuth turn AZ turn The AZ turn is the Azimuth turn rotation of the antenna element This can be used to simulate an inaccurate mechanical alignment or an erratic radiation dia gram due to wet snow on the radome or faulty contact points in the antenna ele ment assembly The antennas can be turned upto 90 in the horizontal plane azimuth to simulate errors in the antenna radiation diagram Note Azimuth angles are defined POSITIVE when rotated clockwise The effect of AZ turn is particularly evident on Approaches Window diagrams and Ground current 3D graphs The effect also depends on the antenna element type AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 14 20 AUG 1994 silii AXIS 330 NANCO Software Control Panel Fig CPN307 The AZ tu
241. sert CE3OFEEWEL FAm AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 WND 9 AXIS 330 User s Manual Fig WND603 The 3D graphic with the Parameter toggle 4 selection 6 3 Functions The functions of the graphic display are F1 B amp W Black amp White to Colour Selector F2 Invert Display invert the colours for cut amp paste purposes F3 Print Print the curve to a printer F4 Save Save a B amp W graph for later play back 6 3 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector F1 B amp W This function is used to toggle the graph between colour and black amp white The F1 key will turn the graph into black background and white lines Re peating the F1 key will restore the colour display 6 3 2 F2 Display Inverter F2 Invert This function will invert the colours of the display In the colour display the colours will be changed to their complementary ones 6 3 3 F3 Printout F3 Print This function allows the feed parameters and the graph to be printed out for documentation purposes Make sure that correct printer driver Grafplus or Graflasr is loaded before starting the AXIS 330 otherwise no graph will be printed only the text Normally this is done by the GP BAT file Note If you haven t the colour printer it is recommended to change display inverted black amp white mode using F1 and F2 keys before print ing 6 3 4 F4 Graph Saver F4 Save Note This function is enabled and displayed only when the
242. sheets CAlt F8 gt List of Scattering Objects Obj Type Fud Sdw Lgt Hgt d Hgt II Rot Tilt Rf1 Opt Setup 1 82 58m Gm 8 Gm 13 6m 5 7m 90 go 1 88 2 S 356m 22m 36 8m 7 8m 2 3m 90 go 1 88 3 8 358m bim 22 6m 8 8m 2 3m 90 go 1 88 CF2 4dd lt F3 Delete F4 Remove all CF5 Sort F6 gt List CF Optimize lt CR gt CtrlPan Fig SCA301 The screen of the Scattering Object Editor 3 1 Modify Data To modify any data of the object use the arrow keys to highlight the data and use lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt or lt Ins gt lt Del gt keys to change the value of the data in the same way as in the Control Panel 3 2 Commands There are eight commands for handling the list of the object 1 F2 Add add a new object 2 Alt F2 Copy copy the highlighted object 3 F3 Delete erase one object highlighted 4 F4 Remove remove all objects 5 F5 Sort sort the objects 6 F6 List to compute optimize setting 7 F7 Optimize set optimizing 8 Alt F8 Offset sheets offset all sheets together in x y z coordinates 9 lt CR gt CTRL Panel exit 3 2 1 F2 Add Add command is used to add one more scattering object When this command is executed the program jumps to the data entry as described earlier AXIS 330 NANCO SCA 18 20 JAN 2005 Software AXIS 330 NANCO Software Scattering Object Editor 3 2 2 Alt F2 Copy Copy command is used to copy the highlighted scattering object This is a quick wa
243. ssssseesese 21 6 4 2 The object falls inside the inversion point 22 6 4 3 The actual flight path deviates from the theoretical one 23 AXIS 330 NANCO Software BND ii 20 AUG 1994 Bend Analysis Mode 1 Description The Bend Analysis mode includes two options 1 Analyse Bend 2 Make Bend The Analyse Bend option is used for finding the possible origin of reflections that produce bends on the GP signals Make Bend option is a reverse process and is used for tutorial purposes Analyse Bend Option The Analyse Bend option is based on the entered bend wavelengths and their location along the flight path which can be read from the flight measurement recordings Every entered bend point max 6 is then computed and plotted as a hyperbolic curve on the horizontal plane The hyperbolic curve represents a line where the reflection source must be located to cause the observed bend pattern The possi ble origin of the reflection object s can be found where the hyperbolic curves intersect or as we often say the curves converge into a solution If the curves do not intersect eachother we have no result or in other words a divergent solution The horizontal surface on which the hyperbolic curves are drawn is called the projection level This level can be raised to any level to be able to find high reflec tion objects Make Bend Option The Make Bend option is started with entering
244. t of Window center Window overview seen from Ground Runway GP Angle r 4 Fee cep 12 degrees 12 degrees Window overview seen from Air Fig WND101 The Window Diagram The Window covers elevation angles from zero to 1 75 times GP angle and azimuth angles from 12 to 12 The GP courseline position is shown as a ISO CDI line Constant Deviation stretching between 12 and 12 in azimuth The Window diagram is very useful of detecting system errors from the position and appearance of the ISO CDI lines The Window Diagram is often called a footprint of the GP site Any changes in this footprint is an indication of that something is going wrong Especially in M Array systems the window will change considerably even for small errors and long before detected by the monitors AXIS 330 NANCO 20 AUG 1994 WND 1 Software AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Data Screen The Data Screen is divided into three main parts 1 the table of numeric data 2 the toggle panel 3 the command row Window unre inea Evaze Bata for new run Iiztance 1 1888 EMI nifzut i22m LLZ Cuurzm Sector 4 Bar HIGH AZ angle in takla CBS HI CH x HEH zcription CBI L LEIBO Flag ack creun Flnr Fig WND201 The Data Screen of the Lateral Trace Mode 2 1 Table of Numeric data 1 The numeric data include the parameters used for the orbit computation FWD Distance Distance from the antenna array to t
245. t Enter gt 2 description Existing text The text field of 21 characters that gives a short description of the system and any particular settings or errors This text will be displayed at the top right hand side ofthe Control Panel Press Esc for returning to Control Panel without saving any file 4 7 3 Kill F4 The Kill command is used to kill the files and will display all the setup files in the FILES directory The cursor appears on the first file name Move it with the arrow keys and press CR to kill the file Press Esc to return without killing any file MARIE 338 ILE GLIBEERTH SIRULATOR cr ERO Timm Hill LCR to colect Text zutup Exc to cancel TEET 3 XBOCUM 3 XBIBEURT 2 HHHH 3 THYE 3 24413962 bytes Free Fig CPN405 Typical Kill file Screen The operation is similar as Load expect you are warned and prompted Are you sure Y N before making any deletion AXIS 330 NANCO CPN 24 20 AUG 1994 Software Control Panel 4 7 4 New directory F5 The New Directory command let you change the directory or disk drive for the files Enter new directory lt CR gt Default gt The command is cancelled by lt Enter gt otherwise type the complete path and directory without the final backlash like the following examples C myfiles or Az Note If the directory does not exist a warning will be shown Press the F8 key to create the named dir
246. t it will show only the reflected signals Useful when checking where and how reflections appear SENSE Will invert the direction of FLY UP and FLY DOWN on the graphs This function is also available in the toggle panels THEO Enables using a theodolite where the head is tilted to the approach glide path angle When turned 90 in azimuth the theodolite head will be horizontal Examples gp air cut The window diagram is viewed from the air and the only the reflected signals will be visible in amplitude modes 9p sense nodate The curves will have the FLY UP direction in the upper part of the diagram and the date and time will not be displayed on the screen heading and printouts Note The optimum screen mode is only checked and saved at the first run of the AXIS 330 If the screen is changed to another type put the NODATE argument after the startup command in order to remove the date and time in the headings and printout GP NODATE AXIS 330 NANCO GEN 14 20 JUN 2005 Su AXIS 330 NANCO Software AXIS 330 User s Manual CPN Control Panel Table of Content 1 BDeseriptiona uso ot n dap tO EO RERO IER 1 2 Scr en layout ede HE HE ge HS EE 2 1 Info Fields 2 2 Data Fields JDA ENS Sn RU A RN LLLI DIA MM EIL D M EMT CARICA ie a E pee E iei 3 1 1 GlidePath type 3 1 2 Operating Frequency 3 1 3 GlidePath Angle 3 1 4 Forward S
247. t the object location even though the projection level is Om AXIS 330 NANCO BND 20 20 AUG 1994 Software Bend Analysis Mode Bem fwalysis Track AZ B B Proj level Ma I AXIS 338 r RTE Non existing mirror Spe 1 8 SR 00 Ch Ed ji ju ais hs ds da i ju C B o NL RID GP ae L curves converge Steril io Samples 12 3 2 1 4 Poly Pode FIDBAU FZlmwwert F3 Priut CFA Save Fig BND607 Hyperbolic lines for a 10m high reflecting object 1250m directly in front of the 3 GP The curves converge very near the object location even when the projection level is Om 6 4 Convergence of the hyperbolic curves Bend analysis has several limitations The three most important are 6 4 1 Several reflection objects If there are several reflection objects the bend patterns from each of them will interfere with each other so when in phase they will add to large amplitudes and when in antiphase they may cancel Picking bends from such a pattern may lead to divergent or misleading solutions One good solution is to carefully observe the approach curve and select short portions that may look like periodic sine waves Here is a good chance that one object dominates the bend pattern and it may be possible to locate that Further sine wave looking portions on the curve may be caused by another object making it impossible to get a reliable result If only one bend p
248. talics are used for emphasis the important information Especially all notes and warnings are printed in italics nn Angle brackets indicates the special keys on the keyboards examples lt F1 gt lt Enter gt lt PgUp gt Note CHR key is the same as Return or Enter key CR is a short for Carriage Return used at typewriters AXIS 330 NANCO GEN 6 20 JUN 2005 Software General 5 Getting Started 5 1 System Requirements AXIS 330 requires the following computer system t An IBM PC or any computer that conforms to the IBM PC AT MS DOS standard running MS DOS version 3 1 or later CPU 286 or better with a math coprocessor 512 kB of available memory RAM A hard disk drive with a minimum of 1 megabytes of free space A floppy disk drive and ii Graphic adapter VGA or better 5 2 User Code AXIS 330 is delivered with different access levels to run the different MODES in the Menu Each mode has its Access Code which is included in the User Code that is entered the first time 5 3 Program CD The distribution program disk contains many files An ASCII file FILES TXT contains a list of the distributed files To make sure that all files are included the user can print outthe file FILES TXT that contains the complete list of files in the disk 5 4 Installing the AXIS 330 5 4 1 Making Backups Make backup copies of the AXIS110 files to guard against loss AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20
249. tand the receiver is setto 95 as we assume flat airport surface 4 1 2 Diffraction Depending on the horizontal rotation angle of the sheet a similar diffracted sig nal with sidelobes will arise behind the sheet along the extended line from the transmitter to the sheet The Physical Optics mathematical model uses the F resnel Kirchhoff diffraction integral to compute the scattered signal in the three dimensional space around the sheet 20 AUG 1999 AX1 5 AXIS 330 User s Manual SCAT Reflection from a smooth rectangular area is computed as a diffraction from an equivalenttransformed aperture Babinets principle Assuming farfield conditions where the distance gt gt sheetsize and antenna aperture large surfaces are not broken down into smaller ones as one will obtain the same result with a big one Fornearfield conditions or having large sheets like fences the objects should be divided into smaller pieces by defining smaller sheets standing side by side or stacked on top of each other making up a similar area TheFresnel Kirchhoff diffraction integral jA cos cosO j R R e ds 2 RR Where A incidentsignal amplitude atthe sheetcenter R incidentsignal path length R emanentsignal path length Q incidentangle to the sheet normal Q emanentangle from the sheetnormal e The reflection diffraction will emanate from the center ofthe sheet Transmitter Receiver scatte
250. tas 4 Toggles 1 A mplitude range D efinition E P S WASC nnne nnne Jarameter noeneen jeen from 4 6 W nd lt gt 3D 5 Commands 5 1 F2 Change 5 2 F93 Text e 5 3XF 10 Mens ir trt ER cesta REP ET OPERAI MIS 5 4 Continue CR tense decet eere etae certnm e nce nad 6 Graphic Display 6 1 Two dimensional graphic 6 1 1 Equipment info 1 6 1 2 Graphic diagram 2 6 1 3 Elevation angles 3 6 1 4 Half sectors 4 6 2 Three dimensional graphic 6 3 F nctions ee cer i eee eerie roce 6 3 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector 6 3 2 F2 Display Inverter sese 6 3 9 F3 PrintoUL ine uet etie 6 3 4 F4 Graph Saver 7 More about Window diagram 7 1 Null Reference Window Diagram 7 2 M Array Window Diagram 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 JAN 2005 WND i AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 NANCO WND ii 20 JAN 2005 Sonate Window Overview Mode 1 Description The Window Diagram shows the Approach Window as seen from the ground station towards the approaching aircraft or from the air towards GP p INNO lecce 8 i i i d onesies pote E GP Angle E EE ps 12 degrees 12 degrees n E 2 je GP mast Sideways offse
251. te e plebe ass 10 7 GAME Display aea AIN ARR eni dendo 11 7 1 Graphic Diagram usua ne ne Er gna ia ons pese pet venu pi ee 11 PAF UNC HONG nodi AAS tal s Date LLL LI D A CE t 12 7 2 1 F1 Black amp White to Colour Selector 12 7 2 2 F2 Display Inverter ss ana ana ne nt At 12 20 3 US 22 AO 0 1 RE ne ve net te pe ope De 12 7 2 4 F4 Graph Saver EE nere erat A Ne Aa ure di Eee 12 7 2 5 F8 Scattering Object Editor ssseesssssssss 13 7 2 6 Alt F8 Offset all Scattering Sheets together 13 72A C me Tract Tc ne M nine 14 7 3 Computing the Glidepath Angle and Datum 16 8 Theodolite positioning nnn 17 S T Error compensation coeno Loco tanto oet Mont noie 17 8 2 Error by sloping reflection plane seeeeeseeessssssss 18 GS TIMING ANG IG 2228 2k 8S CN Do E D EE DE 19 AXIS 330 NANCO APP ii 20 SEP 2006 Sea Approach Mode 1 Description The Approach Mode simulates a movement along the approach path towards the landing point on the runway depending on the tracking option Fig APP101 Approach mode There are three tracking options in the Approach mode 1 Hyperbolic This tracking mode represents an ideal hyperbolic line along the zero deviation line of an ideally adjusted GP system Any deviation from the zero deviatio
252. ted as point B C or T Threshold For Pt C Fwd the longitudinal distance from the GP mast Sdw the lateral distance from the GP mast Hgt the height above the GP zero For Track A X Start the tracking start distance from the GP Point A is default Stop the tracking stop distance from the GP Calculation parameters These parameters determines the receiver path as well as the maximum allowa ble bends Elevation ang the elevation angle of the tracking path of the RX Threshold dist the landing threshold distance from the GP Receiver speed the receiver speed in knots Static bends the maximum bends from fixed objects Limit of bend the maximum allowable bends of the scattering object 2 2 Scattering Object Data 2 Scattering object is a moving sheet to be used for computation Length the length of the sheet Hgt the height of the sheet Btm Hgt the height of the sheet bottom edge above the ground Rot the rotation angle of the sheet Tilt the tilt angle of the sheet Refl the reflection factor of the sheet AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 2002 SNS 3 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 3 Toggles 3 There are seven toggles in the sensitive area mode allowing you to change the setting of the parameters effecting the graph computation A dd selection for what items are added into the graph display T rack The receiver track along the glide path E rase old computed sensitive area data erasing O rientation the sensitive
253. th surface 15 Large hill 200 x 30m smooth surface 20 Large hangar 100 x 30m smooth surface 20 If a secondary reflection plane exists beyond the object itis assumed to be a horizontal but not well graded surface with a reflection factor of 0 3 Fig AX1 404 A Top may have a secondary reflection plane beyond it The vertical heightdifference between the secondary plane and the top can be set between 0 1m to 999m If this heightis setto zero a secondary plane is assumed to be non existing like a very rough and absorbing terrain and only the top will radiate like a free space signal source The T type objectis useful to inserta general reflection objectinto a specific GP model to compare bend patterns from certain sections from the flight inspection approaches 4 4 The Ridges or earth walls The R type scattering model is used to simulate ground edges besides orin front ofthe reflection plane S imilarto S emispheric Hill Top butthis ridge can be a long stretched hill where the reflection pointis located on the ridge along a line directly from the GP mast to the receiver The R type model fora horizontal ridge is very much like the T type object where the line of intersection through the ridge slices outa hill top on the stretch from the GP mastto the receiver position Depending on the length and the azimuth orientation of the ridge the top slice will move so it will be in line between the GP mastand the receiver When thi
254. the known location of the reflecting object The theoretical bend wavelengths are then computed at the entered dis tances max 6 These points will be converted into hyperbolic curves in order to give analysing exercise when the answer is known AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Analysing process The first step in analysing bend from an approach on a given elevation angle is to select some periodic like bends at different distances As the bend length vary along the approach path momentary values should be found Use only a half or quarter bend wavelength from the curve to determine the distance as exact as possible Convert the fractional bendlength to one wave length at this distance by multiplying it by two or four Fig BND201 Bend selection using a half bend wavelength 2B D distance to bend center The bend length corresponds to an angle between the direct and incident reflect ed signal given by 0 cos 1 0 Bendlength formula BND201 when approaching towards the glide path This angle represents the opening angle in a cone whose intersection with the terrain gives the geometrical solution for the possible origin of the reflec tion object This intersection forms a hyperbolic curve on the ground AXIS 330 BND 2 NANCO 20 AUG 1994 Software Bend Analysis Mode GP Fig BND202 The hyperbolic curve represents the projection of the open
255. tilities Table of Content T Description oett RERBA AeA te NN 1 2 MCU settings 2 1 MCU Panel 2 1 1 Adjustable parameters 1 2 1 2 Command set 2 2 2 Changing data values 2 2 1 Monitoring Angle 1 eee 2 2 2 Antenna attenuators 2 2 2 3 Phase shifter 3 2 3 COMMANAS eicere rege 2 3 1 Simulation angles quick selection 2 9 2 H6lp 5 eee EDUC Un Oe 2 3 3 Value stepping keys 2 3 4 Returning with value settings 2 3 5 Returning without any settings 3 ADU adjustments 3 1 ADU Panel 3 1 1 Adjustments 1 inrita esterna 3 1 2 Gonnectors 2 rire Sar d d Acad REN del 3 1 3 Commands 3 St 3l Help eet 3 1 3 2 Value stepping keys 3 1 3 3 Returning with value settings eeeeses 3 1 3 4 Returning without any settings 4 Reflection plane slope computation 4 1 RPL Command Screen 4 1 1 Load File F2 4 1 2 Compute New F3 4 1 3 Continue F4 iii 43 4 Quit OBSESSA cedes 4 2 RPL Result Panel 4 3 Functions in RPL Result Panel 4 3 1 F2 Graphic 4 3 2 F3 SAVE unread REP ete retis 4 3 3 F4 FSL 4 3 4 F5 List data 43 5 ORQUIU sn net ete REA An Ea
256. ting the software the default setup configuration will come up This can be changed and saved as a new setup by using the F3 key of the Control Panel The setup configuration includes GP type site data frequency and antenna front terrain data clearance data in case of M ARRAY GP side and antenna type printer settings form feed and character set Screen type receiver response Low Pass Filter and colour palette Detailed description is given in the SET section 7 4 Startup Arguments After the GP command some arguments parameters can be attached in order 7 5 Pasting Graph into Windows applications For pasting graph into Windows applications like MS Word Adobe PhotoShop etc one must first use the Save Pictures function in Mode 1 PlayBack Screen Files See the PLY chapter Use the dedicated AXIS Conversion software in the AXIS directory for loading the AXGOO0 BAS or AXLOO BAS files in the SHOW directories The files are saved as PNG files which can be put into other word files 20 JUN 2005 GEN 13 AXIS 330 User s Manual to setthe software in certain modes The first argument must be proceeded by a symbol division symbol AIR The Window diagram will be seen from the air as default Otherwise it will be seen from the ground NODATE The date and time is not displayed or printed CUT Cuts the direct signals from the antennas and reflection plane If reflection objects are presen
257. tional practical tests or advice from a second source of consultance should be considered AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 FEB 2010 AXIS 330 User s Manual Checklist for AXIS 330 version RAO Page Date Page Date Page Date GEN i 20 JUN 2005 SET 1 20 NOV 1994 SCA 17 20 JAN 2005 GEN ii 20 JUN 2005 SET 2 20 NOV 1994 SCA 18 20 JAN 2005 GEN 1 20 JUN 2005 SET 3 20 NOV 1994 SCA 19 20 JAN 2005 GEN 2 20 JUN 2005 SET 4 20 OCT 2005 SCA 20 20 JAN 2005 GEN 3 20 JUN 2005 SET 5 20 NOV 1994 SCA 21 20 FEB 2010 GEN 4 20 JUN 2005 SET 6 20 NOV 1994 PLY i 20 AUG 1994 GEN 5 20 JUN 2005 SET 7 20 NOV 1994 PLY ii 20 AUG 1994 GEN 6 20 JUN 2005 SET 8 20 NOV 1994 PLY 1 20 AUG 1994 GEN 7 20 JUN 2005 SET 9 20 NOV 1994 PLY 2 20 AUG 1994 GEN 8 20 JUN 2005 SET 10 20 NOV 1994 PLY 3 20 AUG 1994 GEN 9 20 JUN 2005 PLY 4 20 AUG 1994 GEN 10 20 JUN 2005 UTL i 20 AUG 1994 PLY 5 20 AUG 1994 GEN 11 20 JUN 2005 UTL ii 20 AUG 1994 PLY 6 20 AUG 1994 GEN 12 20 JUN 2005 UTL 1 20 AUG 1994 GEN 13 20 JUN 2005 UTL 2 20 OCT 1995 LAT 20 OCT 1997 GEN 14 20 JUN 2005 UTL 3 20 OCT 1995 LAT ii 20 OCT 1997 UTL 4 20 OCT 1995 LAT 1 20 OCT 1995 CPN i 20 AUG 2002 UTL 5 20 AUG 1994 LAT 2 20 OCT 1997 CPN ii 20 AUG 2002 UTL 6 20 AUG 1994 LAT 3 20 AUG 1994 CPN 1 20 AUG 1994 UTL 7 20 AUG 1994 LAT 4 20 OCT 1995 CPN 2 20 AUG 2002 UTL 8 20 AUG 1994 LAT 5 20 AUG 1994 CPN 3 20 AUG 1999 UTL 9 20 AUG 1994 LAT 6 20 OCT 1997 CPN 4 20 OCT 1995 UTL 10 20 AUG 1994 LAT 7 20 AUG 1994 CPN 5 20 AUG 2002 UTL 11 20 AU
258. to circle FWD Dist m lt 10000 F2 Multiple runs The range of circle represents the radius of orbit where the center point lies on the line perpendicular to the runway through the GP mast This mode allows upto 6 orbit at user specified distances and center points The default value is one run in the distance of 10000m 6NM and center point on the runway center If multiple orbit is wanted press F2 enter the number of runs and the range radius and center offset of each run Hale 44k ILE uLIBEFHIH EIBULHIUS thn RRR Lateral Trace ee Range to circle ama 188845 F23Multigplm runz Hurkur of rung i 63 13 1 3 Range to circle Ami 188885 EH Bistance ima 122 I Range to circle ama 18884 1888 EH Bistance ima 122 0 61 Rangu to circle Ami 1888 p SE EH Biztance m fly rp Fig LAT302 Data Entry for multiple range of orbit AXIS 330 LAT 4 NANCO Software 20 OCT 1995 Lateral Trace Mode 3 2 Sideways Distance SDW Distance lt 122 gt Twds RWY The sideways distance represents the lateral distance from the GP centerline to the orbit center Note The negative sign means the distance is measured towards the run way from the GP antenna The positive value shows the distance away from the runway 3 3 Elevation angle Elevation angle 9 3 The elevation angle seen from the orbit center RPI referred to the horizontal 3 4 Start angle
259. to restrict taxing aircraft movements during instrument landing T to examine the effect of planned buildings or constructions in order to make a qualified recommendation for approval or disapproval of erecting it 5 to learn what impact different antenna systems will have in different airport environments For procurement situations this may also form a check on the manufacturers claim of system performance For possible arguments that might occur in this context it should be noted that no mathematical model can fully simulate a real situation and that the manufacturer probably has long and qualified experi ence in modelling sites AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1999 AX 1 1 AXIS 330 User s Manual 2 Antenna system The computation of the antenna system radiation pattern is based on the indi vidualantenna elementradiation pattern the physical position and orientation and the feeds amplitude and phase The input parameters for each element are type of antenna element height above the effective ground plane lateral offset azimuth turn complex signal components CSB SBO and CLR gain phase The horizontal radiation pattern is based on an approximation formula Every type of antenna element has its own formula and the error in 80 azimuth is less than 5 96 compared to the original one AX1 2 20 AUG 1999 AXIS 330 NANCO Software Appendix 1 Glide Path Model 3 Reflection Plane Th
260. uching each other see fig BND603 along the Om projection level Bend Analysis Track AZ 0 0 Proj level 15a KIS 338 converges in one position Fig BND605 Convergent hyperbolic lines for 15m level projection for a reflecting point 1250m directly in front of the 3 GP elevat ed 15m The curves are touching each other at the object surface see fig BND603 along the 15m projection level AXIS 330 NANCO Software 20 AUG 1994 BND 19 AXIS 330 User s Manual Bend Analysis Track AZ 0 0 Proj level 3800 I AXIS 1307 comverges in another position 108a diu Samples o 1 Z 3 Fig BND606 Convergent hyperbolic lines for 30m level projection for a reflecting point 1250m directly in front of the 3 GP elevat ed 15m The curves are converging at another location as they will not meet directly above the object see fig BND603 along the 30m projection level 6 3 Reflecting object for a normal GP site This GP is located at the nominal 122m 400 to the side of the runway A reflecting point located 1250m directly in front of a 3 GP at 10m height gives these bend lengths at some distances when flying along the runway center line use F2 to compute the bend lengths Distance Bendlength 3000m 433m 2500m 201m 2000m 66m The projection level is not critical when not flying directly towards the GP mast At the following graph the hyperbolic curves seem to intersect a
261. udes CAT Category C CSB Clearance CSB C DEV Clearance deviation CDI Course Deviation Indication The full scale of the cockpit indicator is 150uA representing 15 5 96 DDM CEGS Capture Effect Glide Slope CE Courseline Clearance The CSB and SBO signals that will cover the sectors outside the coverage of the course signal in dual frequen Cy Systems The clearance carrier frequency is normally spaced 8 kHz from the course carrier frequency Also used for CDI values greater than 150uA outside the course sector CLR Clearance Course The CSB and SBO signals that will radiate with maximum signal along the localiser course line in single and dual frequency systems Course line The locus of points to the runway centerline in any hori zontal plane at which the DDM is zero C P HI Clearance Phase CPN Control Panel section of this manual CR Carriage Return Enter key CRS Course CS Course Sector A sector in a horizontal plane containing the course line and limited by the loci of points nearest to the course line at which the DDM is 0 155 C SBO Clearance SBO CSB Carrier and SideBands The carrier equally modulated 2096 with 90 Hz and 150 Hz sine wave Amplitude and phase defined as only the carrier part of CSB CTR Center CTRL panel Control Panel D dB deciBel DEV Deviation Same as CDI DEF Abbreviation of this section DEG Degrees DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation In this context defined as m150 m90 Dist D
262. ure Effect Glide Slope The simulation is based on a three dimensional mathematical model of a glide path antenna system and a terrain Aterrain model can easily be made with longitudinal amp lateral slopes and ground types as well as upto 16 scattering objects of five different types 1 Short truncated ground plane 2 Semispheric Hill Tops 3 Ridges in terrain 4 Rectangular Sheets 5 Wire sections The scatter computation is based on the Fresnel Kirchhoff diffraction integral for reflection diffraction and shadowing The site models can be stored on the disk for later use or exchanged with other AXIS users There are eight simulation modes in the AXIS 330 Lateral trace Simulation of a perpendicular orbit Vertical trace Simulation along a vertical line above given coordi nates Window overview ISO Deviation lines in the coverage sectors Approach mode Simulation of an approach path Fixed position Simulation of the deviation and amplitudes in one or two fixed positions while varying a feed parameter Ground current Visualization of the ground current induced on the reflection plane Bend analysis To analyse the bends along the flight path to find the possible origin of the reflected signals Sensitive area Simulation of moving aircraft or vehicles to find a border of the sensitive area In addition the AXIS 330 has a Playback Screens mode for displaying the previously saved graphic
263. xecute the given function When the toggle listis translated this letter may be changed in the new word and the new first charcter between brackets will now be the action key However the order of the listed commands mustnotbe changed as the software will always take the first com mand as the Add command regardless ofthe textlanguage and action key ithas been given There can not be two identical first char acters among the words on the same listas the software will only respond to the first one listed 6 Exceptthe first two sections Control Panel and Menues and the Tog gle panel lists To x the textlines are terminated by a colon to meas ure a certain line length so it can match to othertextlines If there is a group of several lines where the colon is located in the same column the colon column may be changed butthey should all have the same length Where itis important that the length should not be changed at all in translation to another language the line is terminated by an asterisk Note thatthe longest lines are not shown in their full length The text file A330LNG NEW in the AXIS directory shows the changes done in the GP 12 UK file since the previous release Itis important to do the similar changes with other language files in order to make the screen text come out correctly AXIS330 ONANCO Software 20 UN 2005 AX2 7 AXIS 330 User s Manual AXIS 330 R40 English Control Panel GP Type FRQ MHz GP
264. y to add another similar object to the model After copying adjust the necessary parameters such as forward and sideways distances and then Sort the objects F5 in the end 3 2 3 F3 Delete Delete command is used to delete one object from the present object list Before executing this command move the cursor up or down to the row that will be deleted Then hit the F3 key and the line will be deleted Note After deletion there is no fast way to restore the object 3 2 4 F4 Remove Remove command will remove ALL OBJECTS without WARNING 3 2 5 F5 Sort Sort command is used to put the present object list in the forward distance order NOTE Sorting is done automatically when entering the scattering object 3 2 6 F6 List List command is used to calculate optimized settings for all objects Settings can be seen in the same row as the object Date AXIS 338 ILS GLIDEPRTH SIMULATOR lt S N 888 Tine Offset all sheets lt Alt F8 List of Scattering Objects Obj Type Fud Sdu Lgt Hgt d Hgt II Rot Tilt Rf1 Opt Setup 1 lt S gt 388n 166m 16 6m 16 6m 4 8m go ge 1 66 298 9 281 2 2 566m 166m 18080 80m 6 616m 16 6m 6 5 wire Er 68 9 226 4 m 3 XR 766m 188m 166 8m 3 6m 5 6m 989 59 5 2180 4 4 lt I gt 888m 188m 38 80m 38 8m 6 26 293 8 143 80 5 G 988m Bm 8 8m 1889 1 66 51 0 192 5 X F2 fidd lt F3 Delete F4 gt Remove all F5 gt S

User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents